You are on page 1of 476

Financial Accounting

Paper F3 (International)
Course Notes
ACF3CN07 (INT)

F3 Financial Accounting (INT)


(Paper Based Exam)
Study Programme

Page
Introduction to the paper and the course............................................................................................................... (ii)
1
2
3
4
5

Introduction to accounting ........................................................................................................................... 1.1


Home study chapter - The regulatory framework ........................................................................................ 2.1
Accounting conventions............................................................................................................................... 3.1
Sources, records and books of prime entry................................................................................................. 4.1
Ledger accounts and double entry .............................................................................................................. 5.1

End of Day 1 refer to Course Companion for


6
7
8
9
10
11

From trial balance to financial statements ................................................................................................... 6.1


Sales tax...................................................................................................................................................... 7.1
Inventory...................................................................................................................................................... 8.1
Tangible non-current assets........................................................................................................................ 9.1
Intangible non-current assets .................................................................................................................... 10.1
Accruals and prepayments........................................................................................................................ 11.1

End of Day 2 refer to Course Companion for


12
13
14
15

Home Study

Introduction to company accounting.......................................................................................................... 20.1


Preparation of financial statements for companies.................................................................................... 21.1
Events after the balance sheet date .......................................................................................................... 22.1
Cash flow statements ................................................................................................................................ 23.1
Home study chapter - Information technology........................................................................................... 24.1

End of Day 5 refer to Course Companion for


25
26

Home Study

Correction of errors.................................................................................................................................... 16.1


Preparation of financial statements for sole traders .................................................................................. 17.1
Incomplete records.................................................................................................................................... 18.1
Partnerships .............................................................................................................................................. 19.1

End of Day 4 refer to Course Companion for


20
21
22
23
24

Home Study

Irrecoverable debts and allowances .......................................................................................................... 12.1


Provisions and contingencies.................................................................................................................... 13.1
Control accounts ....................................................................................................................................... 14.1
Bank reconciliations................................................................................................................................... 15.1

End of Day 3 refer to Course Companion for


16
17
18
19

Home Study

Home Study

Answers to Lecture Examples .................................................................................................................. 25.1


Pilot paper (Questions only) ...................................................................................................................... 26.1
Dont forget to plan your revision phase!

Revision of syllabus
Testing of knowledge
Question practice
Exam technique practice

BPP provides revision courses, question days,


mock days and specific material to assist you in
this important phase of your studies.

(i)

INTRODUCTION

Introduction to Paper F3 Financial Accounting (INT)


Overall aim of the syllabus
To develop knowledge and understanding of the underlying principles and concepts relating to financial
accounting and technical proficiency in the use of double-entry accounting techniques including the preparation
of basic financial statements.

The syllabus
The broad syllabus headings are:
A
B
C
D
E
F

The context and purpose of financial reporting


The qualitative characteristics of financial information and the fundamental bases of accounting
The use of double entry and accounting systems
Recording transactions and events
Preparing a trial balance
Preparing basic financial statements

Main capabilities
On successful completion of this paper, candidates should be able to:

Explain the context and purpose of financial reporting


Define the qualitative characteristics of financial information and the fundamental bases of accounting
Demonstrate the use of double entry and accounting systems
Record transactions and events
Prepare a trial balance (including identifying and correcting errors)
Prepare basic financial statements for incorporated and unincorporated entities

Links with other papers


Corporate Reporting
(P2)

Financial Reporting
(P7)

Accountant in
Business (F1)

Financial Accounting
(F3)

This diagram shows where direct (solid line arrows) and indirect (dashed line arrows) links exist between this
paper and other papers that may precede or follow it.
Paper F7 Financial Reporting, assumes knowledge acquired in paper F3 Financial Accounting, and develops and
applies this further and in greater depth. Paper P2 Corporate Reporting, assumes knowledge acquired at the
Fundamentals level including core technical capabilities to prepare and analyse financial reports for single and
combined entities.

(ii)

INTRODUCTION

Assessment methods and format of the exam


Examiner: Nicola Ventress
The examination is a two hour paper and all questions are compulsory. Questions will assess all parts of the
syllabus and will contain both computational and non-computational elements.
Format of the Exam

Marks

40 two mark questions

80

10 one mark questions

10
90

(iii)

INTRODUCTION

Course Aims
Achieving ACCA's Study Guide Outcomes
A

The context and purpose of financial reporting

A1 The reasons for and objectives of financial reporting

Chapter 1

A2 Users and stakeholders needs

Chapter 1

A3 The main elements of financial reports

Chapter 1

A4 The regulatory framework

Chapter 2

The qualitative characteristics of financial information and the


fundamental bases of accounting

B1 The qualitative characteristics of financial reporting

Chapter 3

B2 Alternative bases used in the preparation of financial information

Chapter 3

The use of double entry and accounting systems

C1 Double entry bookkeeping principles including the maintenance of accounting records


and sources of information

Chapters 4 & 5

C2 Ledger accounts, books of prime entry and journals

Chapters 4 & 5

C3 Accounting systems and the impact of information technology on financial reporting

Chapter 24

Recording transactions and events

D1 Sales and purchases

Chapters 4, 5, 7
& 14

D2 Cash

Chapters 4 & 5

D3 Inventory

Chapter 8

D4 Tangible non-current assets

Chapter 9

D5 Depreciation

Chapter 9

D6 Intangible non-current assets and amortisation

Chapter 10

D7 Accruals and prepayments

Chapter 11

D8 Receivables and payables

Chapter 12

D9 Provisions and contingencies

Chapter 13

D10 Capital structure and finance costs

Chapters 20 &
21

(iv)

INTRODUCTION

Preparing a trial balance

E1

Trial balance

Chapter 6

E2

Correction of errors

Chapter 16

E3

Control accounts and reconciliations

Chapter 14

E4

Bank reconciliations

Chapter 15

E5

Suspense accounts

Chapter 16

Preparing basic financial statements

F1

Balance sheets

Chapter 17

F2

Income statements

Chapter 17

F3

Events after the balance sheet date

Chapter 22

F4

Accounting for partnerships

Chapter 19

F5

Cash flow statements (excluding partnerships)

Chapter 23

F6

Incomplete records

Chapter 18

(v)

INTRODUCTION

Classroom tuition and Home study


Your studies for BPP consist of two elements, classroom tuition and home study.

Classroom tuition
In class we aim to cover the key areas of the syllabus. To ensure examination success you will to spend private
study time reinforcing your classroom course with question practice and reviewing areas of the Course Notes
and Study Text.

Home study
To support you with your private study BPP provides you with a Course Companion which helps you to work at
home and aims to ensure your private study time is effectively used. The Course Companion includes a Home
Study section which breaks down your home study by days, one to be covered at the end of each day of the
course. You will find clear guidance as to the time to spend on various activities and their importance.
You are also provided with progress tests and two course exams which should be submitted for marking as they
become due.
These may include questions on topics covered in class and home study.

BPP Learn Online


Come and visit the BPP Learn Online free at www.bpp.com/acca/learnonline for exam tips, FAQs and syllabus
health check.

ACCA Forum
We have thriving ACCA bulletin boards at www.bpp.com/accaforum. Register and discuss your studies with
tutors and students.

Helpline
If you have any queries during your private study simply contact your class tutor on the telephone number or
e-mail address that they will supply. Alternatively, call +44 (0)20 8740 2222 (or your local training centre if
outside the London area) and ask for a tutor for this paper to speak to you or to call you back within 24 hours.

Feedback
The success of BPPs courses has been built on what you, the students tell us. At the end of the course for each
subject, you will be given a feedback form to complete and return.
If you have any issues or ideas before you are given the form to complete, please raise them with the course
tutor or relevant head of centre.
If this is not possible, please email ACCAcoursesfeedback@bpp.com.

(vi)

INTRODUCTION

Key to icons

Question practice from the Study Text


This is a question we recommend you attempt for home study.

Section reference in the Study Text


Further reading is needed on this area to consolidate your knowledge.

(vii)

INTRODUCTION

(viii)

Introduction
to accounting

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Define and understand the principles of financial reporting.

Identify and define the different business entities of: sole trader, partnership and limited liability company and
recognise the legal differences between them.

Identify the advantages and disadvantages of operating as each of the three types of business entity.

Identify the users of financial statements and state and differentiate between their information needs.

Understand and identify the purpose of each of the main financial statements.

Define and identify assets, liabilities, equity, revenue and expenses.

Exam Context
This chapter introduces the subject of accounting. Questions on this area will most likely focus on the different
characteristics of the three types of business entity: sole trader, partnership and limited liability company.

Qualification Context
Sole trader and partnership accounts are only examined in Financial Accounting. The Fundamentals and Professional
level papers of Financial Reporting (F7) and Corporate Reporting (P2) are set in the context of a limited liability
company. These papers will test your understanding of the content of financial statements and the detailed accounting
rules which companies must apply.

1.1

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Overview
Balance sheet

Income statement

Financial statements

Users of financial
information

Introduction
to accounting

Types of business entities

Sole trader

Partnership

Concept of separate entity

1.2

Limited liability
company

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Accounting

Definition
1.1

Accounting is a way of recording, analysing and summarising transactions of a business.

Proforma financial statements

Income statement
2.1

Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7:


$
Sales
Less:

Cost of sales
Opening inventories
Purchases
Carriage inwards

40,000
110,000
20,000
170,000
(50,000)

Closing inventories

(120,000)
80,000
5,000
3,000
88,000

Gross profit
Sundry income
Discounts receivable
Less:

$
200,000

Expenses
Rent
Carriage outwards
Telephone
Electricity
Wages and salaries
Depreciation
Bad and doubtful debts
Motor expenses
Discounts allowable

11,000
4,000
1,000
2,000
9,000
7,000
3,000
5,000
1,000
(43,000)
45,000

Profit for the period

1.3

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Balance sheet
2.2

Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X7:


$
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Land and buildings
Office equipment
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fixtures

$
100,000
50,000
30,000
20,000
200,000

Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Less: allowance for receivables

50,000
30,000
(2,000)
28,000
5,000
7,000
90,000
290,000

Prepayments
Cash in hand and at bank
Total assets
CAPITAL AND LIABILITIES
Capital
Capital
Profit
Less: drawings

170,000
45,000
(25,000)
190,000

Non-current liabilities
Bank loans

40,000

Current liabilities
Bank overdraft
Trade payables
Accruals

16,000
40,000
4,000
60,000
290,000

Total capital and liabilities

1.4

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Users of financial information

Lecture example 1

Idea generation

Required
What information would these users of financial information be interested in?

Solution
(a)

Investors

(b)

Employees

(c)

Lenders

(d)

Suppliers

(e)

Customers

(f)

Governments and their agencies

(g)

Public

1.5

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Quick Quiz Q2

Accounting records

4.1

In order to be able to produce an income statement and a balance sheet a business needs
to keep a record of all its transactions.

4.2

This process is called bookkeeping.

4.3

Accounting records should be complete, accurate and valid if the information produced is
to be useful for the users of financial information.

4.4

The mechanics of bookkeeping and the accounting records a business should keep will be
covered in Chapters 4, 5 and 6.

Types of business entities

5.1

Businesses fall into three main types:


(a)

Sole trader

(b)

Partnership

(c)

Limited liability company

Sections 2.3, 2.4

The sole trader is the simplest of these forms.

The concept of business entity (separate entity)

6.1

A business is considered to be a separate entity from its owner and so the personal
transactions of the owner should never be mixed with the business transactions.

6.2

When considering a limited liability company this distinction is laid down in law the
company has a separate legal identity.

6.3

In preparing accounts, any type of business is treated as being a separate entity from its
owner(s).

1.6

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

Summary of Chapter 1

7.1

Financial statements are used by a wide variety of users, each with different information
needs. Satisfying the investors needs will mean that the majority of other users needs are
also met.

7.2

There are three main types of businesses. For sole traders and partnerships the owners
have unlimited liability and bear all the risks and reap all the rewards of being in business.
For a limited liability company the shareholders' liability is limited to the extent of their
investment.

7.3

The business entity concept states that a business is a separate entity from its owners

1.7

1: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING

1.8

Chapter 1: Questions

1.9

1: QUESTIONS

1.1

In a sole trader and a partnership the owners are personally liable if the business cannot meet its debts.
Is this statement true or false?

1.2

1.3

True

False

(1 mark)

If a limited liability company goes into liquidation will the shareholders have to make a financial
contribution to help the company pay its creditors?
A

Yes

No

(1 mark)

Which of the following statements most accurately defines the business entity concept?
A

The business must be treated as being separate from its owners.

A business must be set up as a separate legal entity.

1.10

(1 mark)

Chapter 1: Answers

1.11

1: ANSWERS

1.1

1.2

1.3

END OF CHAPTER

1.12

Home study chapter The regulatory framework

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the role of the regulatory system including the roles of the

International Accounting Standards Committee Foundation (IASCF)

International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)

Standards Advisory Council (SAC)

International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)

Understand the role of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter will be knowledge based and so it is important that you are familiar with the role of each body.
The role of IFRIC was tested in the Pilot Paper.

Qualification Context
Financial Accounting introduces the International Accounting Standards Board's role in issuing IFRSs and paper F3
examines some key standards. All of these standards are built upon in the Fundamentals level paper Financial
Reporting (F7) and the Professional level paper Corporate Reporting (P2).

2.1

2: HOME STUDY CHAPTER - THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

Overview
Regulatory
framework

IASCF

SAC

IASB

Issue IFRS

2.2

IFRIC

2: HOME STUDY CHAPTER - THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

Introduction

1.1

Financial statements are produced by an entity's managers in order to show its owners how
the entity has performed over a period of time.

1.2

Company financial statements particularly need to show a true and fair view.
This means a system of regulation is necessary to ensure that financial statements are
produced to a high standard and are comparable across different companies.

Regulatory system

2.1
International Accounting
Standards Committee Foundation
(IASCF)
(22 Trustees)

Standards Advisory Council


(SAC)

International Accounting
Standards Board
(IASB)
(14 Board members)

International Financial Reporting


Interpretations Committee
(IFRIC)

Key:
Appoints
Reports to
Advises

International Accounting Standards Committee Foundation (IASCF)


2.2

The IASCF is a not-for-profit organisation based in the United States which heads up the
regulatory system.
Its Trustees appoint members to the IASB, IFRIC and SAC. They also oversee the
regulatory system and raise the finance necessary to support it.
It has no involvement in the standard setting process.

International Accounting Standards Board (IASB)


2.3
Section 1.4.1

The IASB's principal aim is to develop a single set of high quality accounting standards:
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).
It also liaises with national accounting standard setters (for example the UK's ASB) to
achieve convergence in accounting standards around the world.

2.3

2: HOME STUDY CHAPTER - THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC)


2.4

The IFRIC issues guidance on both how to apply existing IFRSs in company financial
statements and how to account for new financial reporting issues where no IFRS exists. It
reports to the IASB.

Standards Advisory Council (SAC)


2.5

The SAC's principal role is to advise the IASB on a range of issues which include:

The IASB's agenda and timetable for developing IFRSs

Advising the IASB of areas that may need to be considered by IFRIC.

The role of International Financial Reporting


Standards (IFRS)

3.1

IFRSs provide guidance as to how items should be shown in a set of financial statements
both in terms of their monetary amount and any other disclosure.
For example: IAS 2: Inventory states at what amount a company should value its inventory
and also requires that the financial statements breakdown the inventory figure between its
components such as raw materials, work in progress and finished goods.

3.2

If a company follows the relevant accounting standards its financial statements should show
a true and fair view.

Lecture example 1

Exam standard question for 1 mark

What is the role of the International Accounting Standards Committee Foundation?


A

To appoint members of the IASB

To advise the IASB on new accounting standards they should consider issuing.

Solution

2.4

2: HOME STUDY CHAPTER - THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

Lecture example 2

Exam standard question for 1 mark

Which of the following bodies is involved is trying to achieve convergence of global accounting
standards?
A

IASB

IFRIC

Solution

Summary of Chapter 2

4.1

The IASCF appoints members to the IASB, IFRIC and SAC.

4.2

The IASB issues International Financial Reporting Standards.

4.3

The IFRIC issues guidance on how to apply accounting standards.

4.4

The SAC advises the IASB on its agenda.

2.5

2: HOME STUDY CHAPTER - THE REGULATORY FRAMEWORK

2.6

Chapter 2: Questions

2.7

2: QUESTIONS

2.1

2.2

Accounting standards are prepared by


A

the IASB

the IASC Foundation

the IAASB

(1 mark)

Which of the following best describes the role of The International Financial Reporting Interpretations
Committee?
A

Issues International Financial Reporting Standards.

Provides advice on the development of standards.

Interprets International Financial Reporting Standards.

2.8

(1 mark)

Chapter 2: Answers

2.9

2: ANSWERS

2.1

2.2

END OF CHAPTER

2.10

Accounting conventions

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Define, understand and apply accounting concepts and qualitative characteristics.

Understand the balance between qualitative characteristics.

Identify and explain the main characteristics of alternative valuation bases (for example net realisable value).

Understand the advantages and disadvantages of historical cost accounting.

Understand the provision of International Financial Reporting Standards governing financial statements regarding
changes in accounting policies.

Identify the appropriate accounting treatment if a company changes a material accounting policy.

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter are likely to test your understanding of the qualitative characteristics of information. For
example, the Pilot Paper required you to identify the factors that make information reliable. Questions may also ask you
to define accounting conventions.

Qualification Context
Your understanding of the remaining chapters of IASB Framework will be developed in the Fundamentals level paper
Financial Reporting (F7). You should also expect to see more detailed calculations on IAS 8 tested in Paper F7.

3.1

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Overview
Underlying assumptions

The objective of financial


statements

IASB Framework

Qualitative characteristics of
financial information

Elements of financial statements

Accounting conventions

Other issues

Alternative valuation bases

Concepts and conventions

IAS 8: Accounting policies,


changes in accounting
estimates and errors

3.2

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Introduction

1.1

As noted in Chapter 2 financial statements should show a true and fair view of, or present
fairly, the entity's activities. They are produced to provide information to the entity's owners.

1.2

In order for this information to be useful it must possess certain characteristics.

The IASB's Framework for the Preparation and


Presentation of Financial Statements

Conceptual framework
2.1

The IASB's Framework is not an accounting standard.

2.2

It is a set of principles which underpin the foundations of financial accounting.

2.3

Whenever a new accounting standard is issued it will be based on the principles of the IASB
Framework. Furthermore its principles should be applied to account for any item where no
accounting standard exists.

2.4

The Framework is divided into seven sections.


1) The objective
of financial
statements

4) The elements
of financial
statements

2) Underlying
assumptions

Framework

3) Qualitative
characteristics
of financial
information
7) Concepts of
capital and
capital
maintenance
6) Measurement of
the elements of
financial statements

5) Recognition of
the elements of
financial statements

Only sections 1 4 are examinable at Paper F3.

The objective of financial statements


2.5

To provide information about the financial position, financial performance and changes
in financial position of an entity that is useful to a wide range of users in making economic
decisions.

3.3

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Underlying assumptions
2.6

Accruals basis
The effects of transactions and other events are recognised when they occur (and not as
cash or its equivalent is received or paid) and they are recorded in the accounting records
and reported in the financial statements of the period to which they relate.
Going concern
The financial statements are normally prepared on the assumption that an entity is a going
concern and will continue in operation for the foreseeable future.

Quick Quiz Q3

If this is not appropriate, then additional disclosure about the basis of preparation must be
made in the financial statements.

Qualitative characteristics of financial information


2.7
Quick Quiz Q4,
Q10

Comparability

Understandability

Information should be readily


understandable by users
who are assumed to have
reasonable knowledge

For same entity over different


periods: consistency

Between different entities:


disclosure of accounting
policies

Relevance

Reliability

Assist users in evaluating


past and predicting future
events
Materiality

3.4

Faithful representation
Substance over form
Neutrality
Prudence
Completeness

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS
2.8

The elements of financial statements


The five elements of financial statements and their definitions are listed below.
Asset
A resource controlled by an entity as a result of past events and from which future
economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.
Liability
A present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the settlement of which is
expected to result in an outflow of economic benefits.
Equity
The residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all its liabilities, so
EQUITY = NET ASSETS = SHARE CAPITAL + RESERVES
Income
Increases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of inflows or
enhancements of assets or decreases of liabilities that result in increases in equity, other
than those relating to contributions from equity participants.
Expenses
Decreases in economic benefits during the accounting period in the form of outflows or
depletions of assets or increases of liabilities that result in decreases in equity, other
than those relating to distributions to equity participants.

Alternative valuation bases

Historic cost
3.1

Financial statements are generally produced using the historical cost convention where
items are recorded at their historic cost.
For example, if an entity purchased a building in 20X6 for $1 million then the building would
be recorded as an asset at $1 million. The $1 million asset would then be depreciated to
reflect the wearing out of the building. However, in reality, the value of the building may
appreciate over time depending on market values.

3.5

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Lecture example 1

Idea generation

What are the advantages and disadvantages of recording the building at its historic cost of
$1 million? (consider the Framework's qualitative characteristics).

Solution
Advantages of historic cost
(1)
(2)
(3)
Disadvantages of historic cost
(1)
(2)

3.2

Note that in times of rising prices using the historical cost convention will lead to asset
values being too low and profits too high in a set of financial statements.

3.3

Due to the limitations of historic cost, alternative valuation bases exist. They are:

replacement cost
net realisable value
economic value

Replacement cost
3.4

Assets are carried at the amount it would cost to acquire an equivalent asset today.
Liabilities are shown at the amount that would be required to settle the obligation today.
Replacement cost is also known as 'current cost'.

Net realisable value


3.5

This values items at their expected selling price less any costs that need to be incurred
before the item can be sold.
Inventory should always be shown in the financial statements at the lower of cost (historic
cost) and net realisable value.

3.6

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

A Ltd has 100 items in inventory at the year end. The following information is available:
$
1,000
11
2

Total cost of items to date


Expected selling price per item
Costs which still need to be incurred per item before item can be sold
Required
(a) What is the historic cost of the inventory?
(b) What is the net realisable value of the inventory?
(c) What value for inventory should be shown in the financial statements?

$
$
$

Workings

Economic value
3.6
Quick Quiz Q6

This is the value of an item derived from its ability to generate net cash flows. It can also be
known as 'present value'.
For example, the economic value of a machine would be calculated by determining the
value in today's prices, of the future cash inflows from selling items produced by the
machine less the related cash outflows.

3.7

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Summary of Chapter 3

4.1

The IASB Framework provides a set of principles on which financial accounting is based.

4.2

Financial statements should provide information on an entitys financial position, financial


performance and changes in financial position.

4.3

In order for this information to be useful to users the financial statements should contain the
qualitative characteristics of understandability, relevance, reliability and comparability.

3.8

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Additional Notes

3.9

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Other examinable concepts and conventions

5.1

In addition to the concepts and conventions set out in the Framework, the following are also
relevant in the preparation of financial statements.

The business entity concept


5.2

This recognises the distinction between the business and its activities and the owners or
managers themselves. This is particularly important when considering sole trader or
partnership accounts as these businesses are not separately identified by law.

The money measurement concept


5.3

Only items which are capable of being measured in monetary terms should be recognised
in the financial statements. For example, even though a loyal workforce may be of benefit to
a business this value cannot be measured in monetary terms and is therefore not included
on the balance sheet.

The duality concept


5.4

Every transaction has two effects. This is the underlying principle of the double entry
accounting system.

The historical cost convention


5.5

Assets and liabilities are recorded at their historical cost. This is the amount recorded when
the transaction took place.

IAS 8: Accounting policies, changes in accounting


estimates and errors

Accounting policies definition


6.1

Accounting policies are the significant principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices
applied by an entity in preparing and presenting the financial statements.
It is the way the entity has decided to treat an item in its financial statements, for example
whether non-current assets are carried at historic cost or a revalued amount.

Changes in accounting policy


6.2

Changes in accounting policy will only arise if:


(a)
(b)

There is a new accounting standard or statutory requirement.


Using the new policy makes the financial statements more relevant and reliable.

3.10

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

Accounting treatment
6.3

Financial statements contain two years worth of figures. For example a company whose
year end is 31 December 20X7 will show information for 20X7 and 20X6.
The current year figures (20X7) will be produced using the new accounting policy.
In order for the financial statements to be comparable over time the comparative figures
(20X6) will be restated. This means they will be reproduced and drawn up using the 20X7
accounting policies.

6.4

Disclosure
The following disclosure should be made:
(a)
(b)
(c)

The nature of the change in accounting policy


The reasons for the change
The amount of the adjustment in the current period and the comparative period.

Errors
6.5

These are material omissions from, or misstatements in, the financial statements that ought
to have been identified before the financial statements were finalised.
An error is accounted for in exactly the same way as a change in accounting policy.
For example, an entity may discover a material error in the 20X6 figures whilst producing the
20X7 financial statements. When the 20X7 financial statements are produced the 20X6
comparatives should be restated and the error corrected.

3.11

3: ACCOUNTING CONVENTIONS

3.12

Chapter 3: Questions

3.13

3: QUESTIONS

3.1

3.2

The Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements identifies two assumptions
which are the bedrock of accounting. What are they?
A

Consistency and prudence

Accruals and going concern

Materiality and separate entity

(1 mark)

In which of the following circumstances can a change of accounting policy be made?


(i)
(ii)
(iii)

If the directors want to improve the balance sheet value


If required by an accounting standard
If it results in reliable and more relevant information

(ii) only

(i) and (ii)

(ii) and (iii)

(i), (ii) and (iii)

(2 marks)

3.14

Chapter 3: Answers

3.15

3: ANSWERS

3.1

3.2

END OF CHAPTER

3.16

Sources, records and


books of prime entry

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied Chapters 4 and 5 you will be able to:

Identify and explain the function of the main data sources in an accounting system and how the accounting
system provides useful information.

Outline the contents and purpose of different types of business documentation such as an invoice.

Identify the main types of business transactions, for example, sales, purchases, payments and receipts.

Understand and apply the concept of double entry accounting, the duality concept and the accounting equation.

Identify the main types of ledger account and illustrate how to balance and close a ledger account.

Understand and illustrate the uses of journals and the posting of journal entries into ledger accounts.

Identify correct journals from given narrative.

Record credit sale, credit purchase and cash transactions in ledger accounts and day books.

Understand and record sales and purchase returns.

Understand the need for a record of petty cash transactions and security over the petty cash system.

Describe the features and operation of a petty cash imprest system.

Account for petty cash using imprest and non-imprest methods.

Exam Context
Questions are unlikely to feature solely on this chapter, however, you should have a good understanding of what
constitutes an asset, liability, capital, income and expense. You should also be aware of the principal contents of each
book of prime entry and the purpose of the memorandum ledgers.

Qualification Context
These topics are only examined in Financial Accounting.

4.1

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Overview

Balance sheet

Income statement

Sources, records and


books of prime entry

Books of prime entry

Cash book

Sales day book

Memorandum ledgers

Purchase day book

4.2

Petty cash book

Journal book

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

The balance sheet

1.1

An individual could prepare a list of everything they own and everything by owe.

Lecture example 1

Idea generation

Required
List out everything you own and owe.

Solution
(a)

Own

(b)

Owe

1.2

For a business, this list is formalised as a balance sheet and show the entity's assets and
liabilities.
(a)

Asset: is a resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events and from
which future economic benefits are expected to flow to the entity.

(b)

Liability: is a present obligation of the entity arising from past events, the
settlement of which is expected to result in an outflow of economic benefits.
4.3

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Proforma balance sheet sole trader


1.3

Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X7:


$
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Land and buildings
Office equipment
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fixtures

$
100,000
50,000
30,000
20,000
200,000

Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Less: allowance for receivables

50,000
30,000
(2,000)
28,000
5,000
7,000
90,000
290,000

Prepayments
Cash in hand and at bank
Total assets
CAPITAL AND LIABILITIES
Capital
Capital
Profit
Less: drawings

170,000
45,000
(25,000)
190,000

Non-current liabilities
Bank loans

40,000

Current liabilities
Bank overdraft
Trade payables
Accruals

16,000
40,000
4,000
60,000
290,000

Total capital and liabilities

Key features
1.4

(a)

Always headed as at, for the date of the balance sheet.

(b)

Non-current assets - assets held and used in the business over the long-term (i.e.
more than one year).

(c)

Current assets - not non-current assets! Conventionally listed in increasing order of


liquidity (i.e. closeness of assets to cash).

(d)

Capital - what the business owes the proprietor/owner. In this case the sole trader
owns all of the business, i.e. its total net worth.

CAPITAL =
=

ASSETS - LIABILITIES
NET ASSETS

4.4

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY


(e)

Don't include a caption (item heading) if there isnt a value for it.
The balance sheet is a snapshot of the business at one point in time.

The income statement

Profit example
2.1

Suppose a business buys three books for $10 each. Then it sells them for $15 each:
$
45 Income
(30) Expenditure
15

Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Profit is the excess of total income over total expenditure.

NOTE: The business may have other expenses such as rent, telephone bills, etc. to take off
before the true profit is shown.

Proforma income statement - sole trader


2.2

Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7:


$
Sales
Less:

Cost of sales
Opening inventories
Purchases
Carriage inwards

40,000
110,000
20,000
170,000
(50,000)

Closing inventories

(120,000)
80,000
5,000
3,000
88,000

Gross profit
Sundry income
Discounts receivable
Less:

$
200,000

Expenses
Rent
Carriage outwards
Telephone
Electricity
Wages and salaries
Depreciation
Bad and doubtful debts
Motor expenses
Discounts allowable

11,000
4,000
1,000
2,000
9,000
7,000
3,000
5,000
1,000
(43,000)
45,000

Profit for the period

4.5

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Key features
2.3

(a)

Headed up with the period for which the income and expenses are being included.

(b)

The top part

Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit

X
(X)
X

is called the trading account as it records just the trading activities (buying and
selling) of the business.
(c)

Sundry income includes items like bank account interest.

(d)

Do not include nil value captions.

The income statement is a summary of the business' performance over a period of


time think of it as a DVD!

Relationship between the balance sheet and the


income statement

3.1

Balance sheet shows the worth of business at a point in time (financial position).
Income statement shows the trading activities over a period of time (financial
performance).

3.2

The accounting period is the period for which the income statement was prepared. This is
usually a year.

3.3

Therefore, there will be a balance sheet at the beginning of the year (prior year end) and at
the end of the accounting period.
The income statement is for the intervening period.
Income statement for the year ended 31.12.X7

Balance
sheet as at
31.12.X6

Balance
sheet as at
31.12.X7

4.6

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

From business transactions to financial statements

4.1

A business will enter into a number and variety of transactions during an accounting period:
CASH TRANSACTIONS

Sales

Purchases

Wages

Stationery

Acquisition
of non-current
assets

CREDIT TRANSACTIONS

Sales

Purchases

Ultimately all of these transactions must be summarised in the business' financial


statements (ie the balance sheet and income statement).
4.2

This is achieved by having accounting records to record each stage of the process:
Assorted transactions
(eg invoices)

Categorised
(in Books of Prime Entry)

Summarised
(eg nominal ledger, trial balance)

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
(eg Balance Sheet and Income Statement)

4.7

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Books of prime entry

5.1

The business' transactions are categorised with other similar transactions in the books of
prime entry.

5.2
Books of prime entry

Cash book

Receipts

Sales day
book

Purchase day
book

Petty cash
book

Journal book

Small cash
transactions

Adjustments
and errors

Payments

Cash transactions

Credit sales

Credit purchases

Cash book
5.3

(a)

Records receipts and payments into and out of the bank.

(b)

For exam purposes often assumed to be two books, one for receipts, one for
payments.

Cash book (receipts)


5.4

Example:
Date

Narrative

Total
$

Capital
$

2.1.X7

F. Bloggs

4,000

4,000

5.1.X7

J. Spalding

200

6.1.X7

J. Smith

500
4,700
total cash
received

4.8

Sales
$

Receivables
$
200

500
4,000

500

200

reason why cash was


received

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Cash book (payments)


5.5

Example:

Date

Narrative

6.1.X7

Manley &
Co.

6.1.X7

Petty Cash

8.1.X7

Digby Co

Total
$

Purchases
$

Van
$

Rent
$

Payables
$

350

Petty cash

350

50
1,000

50
1,000

1,400

1,000

total cash
payment

350

50

reason why payment


was made

Sales day book


5.6

Lists all sales made on credit, i.e. each individual invoice raised.

5.7

Example:
Date

Customer

3.1.X7

J. Spalding

200

5.1.X7

G. McGregor

400

8.1.X7

J. Spalding

400

14.1.X7

G. McGregor

300
TOTAL

1,300

Purchase day book


5.8

Lists all purchases made on credit, i.e. each individual invoice received.

5.9

Example:
Date

Supplier

1.1.X7

Tewson Co.

400

4.1.X7

Manley & Co.

350

16.1.X7

Manley & Co.

200
TOTAL

4.9

950

Drawings
$

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Petty cash book


5.10 (a)
(b)

Records the movement of physical cash (kept on the premises) in and out of the
petty cash tin.
Used for small incidental expenses.

5.11 Example:
Receipts

Payments

Date

Narrative

Total
$

6.1.X7

Cheque
cashed

50

Date

Narrative

Total
$

7.1.X7

City
Stationers

10

8.1.X7

F. Bloggs

Stationery
$

Travel
$

10
2

Metro fare
12

10

Controlling petty cash the imprest system


An imprest system acts as an accounting control by having a set amount of petty cash.

Quick Quiz Q5, Q6

5.12 (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

Pre-set limit, say $50.


Voucher filled in when money is taken out to pay expenses.
At any time, vouchers + cash = pre-set limit.
At the end of the week/month, the petty cash book is filled in from the vouchers.
The amount needed to bring the balance back up to the pre-set limit = money spent.

Journal book
5.13 Certain transactions do not fit in the main books, for example:
(a)
(b)

period end adjustments


correction of errors

The journal book lists these sundry transactions.

Memorandum ledgers

Purpose
6.1

To know how much is owed by a particular customer or to a certain supplier at a point in


time.
For example, the sales day book shows the sales made on credit to all customers and the
cash book receipts shows the cash received from all sources.
J. Spalding owes the business $400 but this cannot be seen from the books of prime entry
without trawling back through the detailed information.
A separate memorandum ledger is kept to show this information.
4.10

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY


6.2

There are two types of memorandum ledgers kept by the business:


(a)
(b)

6.3

Receivables ledger showing how much is owed by each individual customer.


Payables ledger showing how much is owed to each individual supplier.

The entries in these ledgers are made by rearranging the information in the day books into
individual customer and supplier accounts.

Receivables ledger
6.4

Example:
J. Spalding (Customer)
Sales
$

Date

Narrative

3.1.X7

Invoice 1032

5.1.X7

Cash received

8.1.X7

Invoice 1101

Cash
$

200

Total
$
200

200
400

400

G. McGregor (Customer)
Date

Narrative

5.1.X7
14.1.X7

Invoice 1033
Invoice 1129

Sales
$

Cash
$

Total
$
400
700

Purchases
$

Total
$
400

400
300

Payables ledger
6.5

Example:
Tewson Co. (Supplier)
Cash
$

Date
1.1.X7

Invoice A112

400

Manley & Co. (Supplier)


Cash
$

Date
4.1.X7

Invoice 063

6.1.X7

Cash book

16.1.X7

Invoice 097

Purchases
$
350

350

350

200

4.11

Total
$

200

4: SOURCES, RECORDS AND BOOKS OF PRIME ENTRY

Summary of Chapter 4

7.1

The balance sheet shows the assets and liabilities of a business at a particular point in
time whilst the income statement shows its performance over a period.

7.2

In order to produce a set of financial statements the business transactions must first be
categorised into the books of prime entry. The totals on these books are then
summarised in the nominal ledger.

4.12

Chapter 4: Question

4.13

4: QUESTION

4.1

Which of the following is not a book of prime entry?


A

Wages day book

Cash book

Sales ledger

(1 mark)

4.14

Chapter 4: Answer

4.15

4: ANSWER

4.1

END OF CHAPTER

4.16

Ledger accounts
and double entry

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied Chapters 4 and 5 you will be able to:

Identify and explain the function of the main data sources in an accounting system and how the accounting
system provides useful information.

Outline the contents and purpose of different types of business documentation such as an invoice.

Identify the main types of business transactions, for example, sales, purchases, payments and receipts.

Understand and apply the concept of double entry accounting, the duality concept and the accounting equation.

Identify the main types of ledger account and illustrate how to balance and close a ledger account.

Understand and illustrate the uses of journals and the posting of journal entries into ledger accounts.

Identify correct journals from given narrative.

Record credit sale; credit purchase and cash transactions in ledger accounts and day books.

Understand and record sales and purchase returns.

Understand the need for a record of petty cash transactions and security over the petty cash system.

Describe the features and operation of a petty cash imprest system.

Account for petty cash using imprest and non-imprest methods.

Exam Context
Your understanding of double entry will be crucial to passing Financial Accounting. Whilst an individual question may
not ask you to produce a double entry it will be instrumental in answering the question. For example, a question may ask
you to derive the income statement expense for electricity where amounts need to be accrued at the year end. You will
only get this right if you understand the double entry for recording expenses and accruals. A question could also
describe a transaction and ask you to identify the correct double entry to record this.

Qualification Context
Being confident at double entry will help you account for many of the more complex accounting standards you will meet
in the Fundamentals level paper, Financial Reporting (F7) and the Professional level paper, Corporate Reporting (P2).

5.1

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Overview
Ledger accounts
and double entry

Double entry

Ledger accounts

Debit

Balancing off

5.2

Credit

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Introduction

1.1

This chapter is designed to enable you to explain the principles of double entry and apply
these principles to the preparation of accounting records within the nominal/general ledger.

1.2

In Chapter 4 we saw how transactions were categorised in books of prime entry, the next
step is to summarise the information in a format nearer to that of the final financial
statements.

The nominal ledger


1.3

(a)

Each item in the balance sheet or income statement will have an "account" (which
might be a page in a book or a record on a computer).

(b)

All the accounts are collected together in the nominal ledger.

(c)

The books of prime entry are totalled up and two entries will be made in these
accounts with each of these totals this is called double entry.

The dual effect


1.4

The method used stems from the fact that every transaction affects two things, for example:
(a)

A sole trader pays $6,000 in the business bank account:


Cash increases by $6,000
Capital increases by $6,000

(b)

A sole trader purchases goods on credit for $400:


Purchases increase by $400
Trade payables increase by $400

Ledger accounts (T-accounts)

2.1

Debit

CAPITAL
$

Decrease Capital

Credit
$

Increase Capital

We make two entries from each total extracted from the books of prime entry, and call one a
Debit (Dr), and the other one a Credit (Cr).
TOTAL DEBITS = TOTAL CREDITS

5.3

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Principles of double entry bookkeeping


2.2

The cash account is a good starting point:


Dr

CASH

Cr

$
CASH IN = DEBIT

$
CASH OUT = CREDIT

General rules
2.3

(a)

DEBIT entry represents:


(i)
(ii)
(iii)

(b)

an increase in an asset;
a decrease in a liability;
an item of expense.

CREDIT entry represents:


(i)
(ii)
(iii)

an increase in a liability;
a decrease in an asset;
an item of income.

This can be remembered as follows

Quick Quiz
Q1 - 4

Debits
(increase)

Credits
(increase)

Expenses

Liabilities

Assets

Income

Drawings

Capital

5.4

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

Required
What is the double entry for each of the following?
Explain each entry in terms of the general rules above.

Solution
Transaction

Debit

(a)

Sales for cash.

(b)

Sales on credit.

(c)

Purchase for cash.

(d)

Purchase on credit.

(e)

Pay electricity bill.

(f)

Receive cash from a credit customer.

(g)

Pay cash to a credit supplier.

5.5

Credit

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY


Transaction
(h)

Debit

Borrow money from the bank.

Lecture example 2

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Douglas had the following transactions during January:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)

Credit

Introduced $5,000 cash as capital;


Purchased goods on credit from Richard, worth $2,000;
Paid rent for one month, $500;
Paid electricity for one month, $200;
Purchased car for cash, $1,000;
Sold half of the goods on credit to Tish for $1,750;
Drew $300 for his own expenses;
Sold goods for cash, $2,100.

Required
Post transactions (1) to (8) to the relevant ledger accounts.

Solution

5.6

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

5.7

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Flow of information

3.1

In Lecture example 2 the original transactions were posted to the ledger accounts. A
business would firstly categorise this information in the books of prime entry. The totals
from the books of prime entry are then posted to the nominal ledger using double entry.

3.2

Balancing off the ledger accounts

4.1

The totals from the books of prime entry may be posted to the nominal ledger each month. A
business will want to know the balance on each account. This is done by 'balancing off' each
account.

Lecture example 3

Technique demonstration

The following information has been posted to the cash account below.
Required
Balance off the cash account to determine the amount of cash held at the end of January.

Solution
Dr
2/1 Sales
10/1 Sales

Cash
$
500
500

5.8

Cr
1/1 Purchases
25/1 Telephone

$
300
50

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

Steps
4.2

(1)

Add the debit and credit sides separately.

(2)

Fill in the higher of the two totals on both sides.

(3)

Literally 'balance' the account (what number do we need and on which side to make
the two sides equal?) balance c/d

(4)

Complete the 'double entry' balance b/d on opposite side.

Lecture example 4

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 2 on page 5.6.
Required
Balance off the ledger accounts for Douglas

Solution
Complete in the solution space for Lecture example 2.

Summary of Chapter 5

5.1

The totals on the books of prime entry are posted to the nominal ledger using double entry.

5.2

The principles of double entry work on the basis that for each debit entry there must be a
credit entry.

5.3

A debit entry increases assets, expenses and drawings and a credit entry increases
liabilities, income and capital this can be remembered as DEAD CLIC.

5.4

At the end of each period the nominal ledger accounts (T accounts) are 'balanced off' to
determine the closing balance on each account.

5.9

5: LEDGER ACCOUNTS AND DOUBLE ENTRY

5.10

Chapter 5: Questions

5.11

5: QUESTIONS

5.1

5.2

A credit balance of $3,000 brought down on X Cos account in Y Cos books means that
A

X Co is owed $3,000 by Y Co

Y Co is owed $3,000 by X Co

Y Co has sold $3,000 of goods to X Co

(1 mark)

Which of the statements below best describes the nominal ledger?


A

A list of all assets and liabilities at a point in time

A collection of accounts to record the transactions of the business

A record of amounts owed to/from individual suppliers and customers

An initial record of internally generated transactions

5.12

(2 marks)

Chapter 5: Answers

5.13

5: ANSWERS

5.1

5.2

The balance represents the outstanding amount i.e. purchases less cash paid.

END OF CHAPTER

5.14

From trial balance to


financial statements

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Identify the purpose of a trial balance.

Extract ledger balances into a trial balance.

Prepare extracts of an opening trial balance.

Identify and understand the limitations of a trial balance.

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter may require you to derive missing figures (for example, profit for the period) using the
accounting equation and identify the correct double entry to record transactions such as closing inventory or drawings.

Qualification Context
Financial Accounting is the only paper where you are required to produce financial statements for a sole trader.
Financial statements for limited liability companies are tested in detail in the Fundamentals level paper, Financial
Reporting (F7) and the Professional level paper, Corporate Reporting (P2).

6.1

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Overview

Trial balance

Closing inventory adjustment

From trial balance


to financial statements

Income statement

Balance sheet

Accounting equation

6.2

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Introduction

1.1

We saw in Chapters 4 and 5 that:

transactions are categorised in the books of prime entry;

the totals are then posted to the ledger accounts in the nominal ledger using double
entry;

the ledger accounts are then balanced off and the balances brought down.

The trial balance

2.1

The trial balance consists of a list of the balances brought down on each ledger account,
separated in to debits and credits as below.

Example
2.2

Miss Smith Trial Balance at as 31 December 20X7:


Account

Debit
$
720

Cash
Capital

500

Sales

2,200
1,100

Purchases
Furniture

500

Electricity

120

Telephone

60

Drawings
Total
2.3

Credit
$

200
2,700

The trial balance should balance, i.e.


Total debits = Total credits
If the trial balance doesn't balance then an error must have occurred.
The correction of errors is covered in Chapter 16.

6.3

2,700

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Lecture example 1

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 2 in Chapter 5 on page 5.6 where the ledger accounts were balanced
off.
Using the ledger accounts for Douglas, prepare the trial balance as at the end of January.

Solution

6.4

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The closing inventory adjustment

Objective
3.1

Whilst a business will purchase items to sell during the year it is unlikely that all of them will
have been sold by the year end.
The items still held at the year end are known as inventories.
These are an asset of the business and so should be included in inventories in the balance
sheet.
Also when a business determines its profit for the year it should match the sales revenue
earned to the cost of goods it sold, ie, cost of sales.

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

Colin opens a business selling cordless telephones. In the first month he buys 50 phones for $20
each, and sells 20 for $30 each. Complete the trading account below.

Solution
$

Sales
Cost of sales
Purchases
Less: closing inventories
Gross profit

Accounting treatment
3.2

The closing inventory adjustment is accounted for via a journal entry. The double entry is:
Dr Inventories (B/S)
Cr Closing inventories (COS I/S)

3.3

This adjustment is usually made after the preliminary trial balance has been prepared.

3.4

Last period's closing inventories will become this period's opening inventories. These items
will be sold in the year and so will form part of cost of sales. As the items are sold they will
no longer be an asset of the business and should be removed from the balance sheet. The
double entry is:
Dr Opening inventories (COS I/S)
Cr Inventories (B/S
This can be done as soon as the new period begins.
6.5

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The income statement

4.1

The income statement is part of the double entry system and can be shown as a T-account.

Completing the income statement


4.2

The balances on all the income and expenditure T-accounts are transferred to the income
statement and the closing inventory adjustment is made.

4.3

The income and expenditure accounts have now been closed out and a new account will be
created for each income and expenditure item next year.

Lecture example 3

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 1 on page 6.4
The cost of goods remaining unsold at year end was $250.
Required
Prepare an income statement in ledger account form.

Solution
Income Statement a/c

6.6

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The balance sheet

Completing the balance sheet


5.1

Balance sheet:
(a)
(b)
(c)

5.2

lists all ledger accounts with balances remaining;


i.e. all assets and liabilities;
is not part of double entry system so these balances are not transferred out.

At end of period, clear balances on income statement and drawings to capital account.

Lecture example 4

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 3 on page 6.6.
Required
Draw up an income statement for the period and a balance sheet at the end of January.

Solution
DOUGLAS
INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE MONTH OF JANUARY
$
Sales
Less cost of sales:
Purchases
Less: closing inventories

Gross profit
Less expenses:
Rent
Electricity

Net profit

6.7

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


DOUGLAS
BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 JANUARY
NON-CURRENT ASSET

Motor vehicle
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash

PROPRIETORS INTEREST

Capital introduced on 1 January


Profit for the year
Less: drawings
Balance 31 January
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Trade payables

6.8

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Lecture example 5

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 4 on page 6.7.
Required
Transfer the profit and drawings to the capital account.

Solution

Drawings
5.3

Drawings are amounts being taken out of a business by its owner. Drawings are generally in
the form of cash, but an owner may also take inventory out of the business. Drawings of
inventories are recorded at the cost of the inventories not the sales price.

6.9

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The accounting equation

6.1

The accounting equation expresses the balance sheet as an equation.

6.2

At its most simple:


ASSETS
(debits)

LIABILITIES
(credits)

Different types of liabilities (credits)

PROFIT
(less drawings)

CAPITAL

PAYABLES

Proprietors interest

Lecture example 6

Technique demonstration

Douglas
Refer to Lecture example 5.
Required
Prepare the accounting equation for Douglas.

Solution

6.10

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Summary of Chapter 6

7.1

The trial balance consists of a list of the balances brought down on each ledger account.

7.2

At the end of the year an adjustment must be made for closing inventory to match sales
revenue to the cost of making those sales and also to reflect the fact that the inventories are
an asset of the business.

7.3

The opening inventory balance should also be transferred to cost of sales.

7.4

The income statement and balance sheet are then produced from the trial balance
(incorporating any adjustments such as closing inventory).

7.5

The accounting equation expresses the balance sheet as an equation.

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 6

8.1

Closing inventory adjustment:


Dr Inventories (B/S)
Cr Closing inventories (I/S)

8.2

Opening inventory adjustment:


Dr Opening inventories (I/S)
Cr Inventories (B/S)

8.3

The accounting equation:


Assets = Liabilities
Assets = Capital + Profit + Payables

6.11

6: FROM TRIAL BALANCE TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

6.12

Chapter 6: Questions

6.13

6: QUESTIONS

6.1

6.2

At the end of the accounting period and after the balance sheet and income statement have been
prepared for a sole trader:
A

All journals are reversed

The balances on asset and liability accounts are transferred to the capital account

The balances on the income statement and drawings account are transferred to the capital account

Balances are carried forward on all the accounts in the nominal ledger

A business has cash of $1,100, trade payables of $2,500, a mortgage liability of $8,000 and land of
$16,000.
What is the proprietor's interest?

6.3

(2 marks)

(2 marks)

Joe, a sole trader, set up business on 1 October 20X6 with $40,000 of his own money. During the year to
30 September 20X7 he won $50,000 on the lottery and paid $30,000 of this into his business. He took
cash drawings of $5,000 during the year and at 30 September 20X7 the net assets of the business
totalled $59,000.
What was the profit or loss of the business for the year ended 30 September 20X7?

6.4

$4,000 profit

$6,000 profit

$16,000 loss

$6,000 loss

(2 marks)

Joan
Joan, a second hand bookseller, has been in business for two months. In this time she:
(1)

paid in cash $5,000 as capital;

(2)

took the lease of a stall and paid two months rent. The annual rental was $1,200;

(3)

purchased, on credit from J Fox, books at cost of $825;

(4)

spent $420 cash on the purchase of other books from W Smith;

(5)

paid an odd-job man $75 to paint the exterior of the stall and repair a broken lock;

(6)

put an advertisement in the local paper at a cost of $10;

(7)

sold three volumes containing "The Complete Works of Shakespeare" to an American for $60
cash;

(8)

sold six similar sets on credit to a local school for $300;

(9)

paid J Fox $525 on account for the amount due to him;

(10)

received $200 from the school;

(11)

purchased cleaning materials at a cost of $10 and paid a char lady $30;

(12)

took $100 from the business to pay for her own personal expenses;

(13)

made other cash sales during the two months of $1,500;

(14)

all books had been sold by the end of two months.

Required
(a)
(b)
(c)

Write up the relevant ledger accounts for these transactions.


Balance off all of the ledger accounts.
Prepare a trial balance, an income statement and a balance sheet.

6.14

6: QUESTIONS

6.5

Brian
Brian set himself up in business on 1 January selling ice creams. During his first two months in business
he:
(1)

Introduced $20,000 of cash as capital into the business;

(2)

Purchased a second hand ice cream van from John. He paid John $10,500 cash;

(3)

Paid Terry $200 to repair the ice cream machine in the van;

(4)

Purchased on credit, inventories totalling $750;

(5)

Spent $400 on petrol;

(6)

Sold goods for $750 in cash;

(7)

Paid $600 in tax and insurance;

(8)

Made additional cash purchases of $80 for strawberry sauce and chocolate flakes;

(9)

Withdrew $300 for his own expenses;

(10)

The cost of goods remaining unsold was $500.

Required
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
6.6

Post transactions (1) (9) to the relevant ledger accounts.


Balance off the ledger accounts.
Prepare a trial balance.
Prepare an income statement in ledger account form (remembering to deal with item 10).
Draw up an income statement for the period and a balance sheet at the end of the period.
Transfer the loss and drawings to the capital account.

Dealers
On 1 January the proprietors interest in a business, Dealers, was $18,500. At 31 January the assets and
liabilities of the business were as follows.
$
Plant and equipment
10,000
Motor vehicles
5,000
Trade payables
3,000
Trade receivables
2,000
Inventories
4,500
Accrued expenses
250
Balance in the bank
3,500
Cash in the till
250
On 7 January the proprietor had paid in additional capital of $2,000. On 14 January he had taken goods
at a cost of $350 for his own consumption and on 30 January had drawn cash of $1,250 from the
business, for his own personal expenditure.
Required
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Calculate the net asset value at 1 January.


Calculate the net asset value of the business at 31 January.
Calculate the profit of the business for the month of January.
Show the accounting equation at 31 January.

6.15

6: QUESTIONS

6.16

Chapter 6: Answers

6.17

6: ANSWERS

6.1

6.2

$6,600

Dr
$
1,100

Cash
Trade payables
Mortgage liability
Land
Proprietor's interest (balancing figure)

2,500
8,000
16,000
17,100

6.3

6,600
17,100

$
40,000
30,000
(5,000)
(6,000)
59,000

Net assets at 1.10.X6


Capital introduced
Drawings
loss for year (balancing figure)
Net assets at 30.9.X7
6.4

Cr
$

Joan
Bank (B/S)
(1)
(7)
(10)
(13)

Capital
Sales
Trade receivables
Sales

$
5,000
60
200
1,500

Balance b/d

6,760
5,390

(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(9)
(11)
(11)
(12)

Rent
Purchases
Repairs
Advertising
Trade payables
Cleaning materials
Cleaning
Drawings
Balance c/d

$
200
420
75
10
525
10
30
100
5,390
6,760

Capital (B/S)
Balance c/d

$
5,000
5,000

(1)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
5,000
5,000
5,000

Rent (I/S)
(2)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
200
200
200

6.18

Balance c/d

$
200
200

6: ANSWERS

Trade payables (B/S)


(9)

Bank
Balance c/d

$
525
300
825

(3)

Purchases

$
825

Balance b/d

825
300

Purchases (I/S)
(3)
(4)

Trade payables
Bank
Balance b/d

$
825
420
1,245
1,245

Balance c/d

$
1,245
1,245

Repairs (I/S)
(5)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
75
75
75

Balance c/d

$
75
75

Advertising (I/S)
(6)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
10
10
10

Balance c/d

$
10
10

Sales (I/S)
Balance c/d

$
1,860
1,860

(7)
(8)
(13)

Bank
Trade receivables
Bank
Balance b/d

$
60
300
1,500
1,860
1,860

Trade receivables (B/S)


(8)

Sales

$
300

Balance b/d

300
100

(10)

Bank
Balance c/d

$
200
100
300

Cleaning materials (I/S)


(11)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
10
10
10

6.19

Balance c/d

$
10
10

6: ANSWERS

Cleaning (I/S)
(11)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
30
30
30

$
30
30

Balance c/d

Drawings (B/S)
(12)

Bank
Balance b/d

$
100
100
100

Trial Balance
Bank
Capital
Rent
Trade payables
Purchases
Repairs
Advertising
Sales
Trade receivables
Cleaning materials
Cleaning
Drawings

$
100
100

Balance c/d

Debit
$
5,390

Credit
$
5,000

200

300

1,245
75
10
1,860

100
10
30
100
7,160

7,160

Joan
Income statement for the two months ended
$

Sales
Purchases
Gross profit
Rent
Repairs
Advertising
Cleaning (10 + 30)

200
75
10
40

$
1,860
(1,245)
615

(325)
290

Profit for the period

6.20

6: ANSWERS

Joan
Balance sheet as at.
$

Current Assets
Trade receivables
Bank

100
5,390
5,490

Proprietor's Interest
Capital
Profit
Less: drawings

$
5,000
290
(100)
5,190

Current Liabilities
Trade payables
6.5

300
5,490

Brian
(a)
(1)
(6)

Capital
Sales

Bank (B/S)
$
20,000
(2)
750
(3)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)

Van
Repairs & Maintenance
Petrol
Tax & Insurance
Purchases
Drawings

$
10,500
200
400
600
80
300

Bank

$
20,000

Capital (B/S)
$

(2)

(3)

(4)
(8)

Bank

Bank

Trade payables
Bank

(1)

Van (B/S)
$
10,500
Repairs & Maintenance (I/S)
$
200
Purchases (I/S)
$
750
80
Trade payables (B/S)
$
(4)
Purchases

6.21

$
750

6: ANSWERS

(5)

Bank

Petrol (I/S)
$
400

Sales (I/S)
$

(7)

(9)

Bank

$
750

Bank

Tax & Insurance (I/S)


$
600

Bank

Drawings (B/S)
$
300

(b)
(1)
(6)

(6)

Capital
Sales

Bank (B/S)
$
20,000
(2)
750
(3)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
20,750

Bal b/d

Bal c/d

Van
Repairs & Maintenance
Petrol
Tax & Insurance
Purchases
Drawings
Bal c/d

$
10,500
200
400
600
80
300
8,670
20,750

8,670
Capital (B/S)
$
20,000
(1) Bank
20,000
Bal b/d

$
20,000
20,000
20,000

Van (B/S)
(2)

(3)

Bank

$
10,500
10,500

Bal b/d

10,500

Bank
Bal b/d

Bal c/d

Repairs & Maintenance (I/S)


$
200
Bal c/d
200
200

6.22

$
10,500
10,500

$
200
200

6: ANSWERS

(4)
(8)

Trade payables
Bank
Bal b/d

Bal c/d

Purchases (I/S)
$
750
80
Bal c/d
830

$
830
830

830
Trade payables (B/S)
$
750
(4) Purchases
750

$
750
750

Bal b/d

750

Petrol (I/S)
(5)

Bank

$
400
400

Bal b/d

400

Bal c/d

(7)

(9)

Bank

Sales (I/S)
$
750
(6) Bank
750

$
750
750

Bal b/d

750

Tax & Insurance (I/S)


$
600
Bal c/d
600

$
600
600

Bal b/d

600

Bank

Drawings (B/S)
$
300

Bal b/d

300
300

(c)

$
400
400

Bal c/d

Trial balance
Bank
Capital
Van
Repairs and Maintenance
Purchases
Trade payables
Petrol
Sales
Tax & Insurance
Drawings

$
Bal c/d

300
300

Debit
$
8,670
10,500
200
830

Credit
$
20,000

750

400
600
300
21,500

6.23

750
21,500

6: ANSWERS

(d)
Purchases
Gross profit c/d
Petrol
Repairs & Maintenance
Tax & Insurance

Income Statement
$
830
Sales
420
Closing inventories
1,250
400
200
600

Gross profit b/d


Net loss c/d

1,200
Net loss b/d

(4)
(8)

Trade payables
Bank
Balance b/d

$
750
500
1,250
420
780
1,200

780
Purchases (I/S)
$
750
80
Balance c/d
830

830
830

830

Income statement

830

Petrol (I/S)
(5)

(3)

Bank

$
400
400

Balance c/d

$
400
400

Balance b/d

400

Income statement

400

Bank
Balance b/d

(7)

Bank
Balance b/d

Balance c/d
Income statement

Repairs & Maintenance (I/S)


$
200
Balance c/d
200
200

Income statement

Tax & Insurance (I/S)


$
600
Balance c/d
600
600

Income statement

$
200
200
200

$
600
600
600

Sales (I/S)
$
750
(6) Bank
750

$
750
750

750

750

6.24

Balance b/d

6: ANSWERS

Closing inventories (I/S)

(e)

Inventories (B/S)
$
500

Brian
Income statement for the two months ended 28 February
Sales
Less cost of sales:
Purchases
Less: closing inventories

$
750

830
(500)
330
420

Gross profit
Less expenses:
Petrol
Repairs & Maintenance
Tax & Insurance

400
200
600

Net loss for the period

((1,200)
(780)

Brian
Balance sheet as at 28 February
Non current assets
Motor vehicles

$
10,500

Current assets
Inventories
Bank
Total assets

500
500
8,670
19,670

Proprietors interest
Capital introduced on 1 January
Loss for the period
Less: drawings

$
(780)
(300)

$
20,000

Balance at 28 February

(1,080)
18,920

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Total capital and liabilities

750
19,670

(f)
(9)

Bank

Drawings (B/S)
$
300

$
Bal c/d

300
300

Capital a/c

300

300
Bal b/d

300

6.25

6: ANSWERS

Income statement
$
830
Sales
420
Closing inventories
1,250
400
Gross profit b/d
200
600
Net loss c/d
1,200

Purchases
Gross profit c/d
Petrol
Repairs & Maintenance
Tax & Insurance

Net loss b/d

780

Bal c/d
Drawings
Net loss
Bal c/d

6.6

$
750
500
1,250
420
780
1,200

Capital a/c

780

Capital account (B/S)


$
20,000
(1) Bank
20,000

$
20,000
20,000

300
780
18,920
20,000

Bal b/d

20,000

Bal b/d

20,000
18,920

Dealers
(a)

Net assets = proprietors interest


Net assets at 1 January are $18,500

(b)

Net assets = assets liabilities


At 31 January the assets total:
$
10,000
5,000
2,000
4,500
3,500
250

Plant and equipment


Motor vehicles
Trade receivables
Inventories
Balance in the bank
Cash in the till
At 31 January the liabilities total:
Trade payables
Accrued expenses
Net assets at 31 January
(c)

Profit

Increase in net
assets between
two points in
time

3,000
250

Drawings between
the same two
points in time

Profit for the month of January =


(22,000 18,500) + (350 + 1,250) 2,000 = $3,100

6.26

25,250
3,250
22,000

Additional capital
paid in between
the same two points
in time

6: ANSWERS

(d)

Accounting equation at 31 January


ASSETS = CAPITAL + PROFIT DRAWINGS
25,250 = 20,500 + 3,100
1,600
Plant & equipment
Motor vehicles
Inventories
Trade receivables
Balance in bank
Cash in the till

$
10,000
5,000
4,500
2,000
3,500
250
25,250

6.27

+ PAYABLES
3,250

Capital at 1 January
Additional capital
Profit
Less: drawings
Trade payables
Accrued expenses

$
18,500
2,000
3,100
23,600
1,600
22,000
3,000
250
25,250

6: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

6.28

Sales tax

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the general principles of the operation of a sales tax.

Calculate sales tax on transactions and record the consequent accounting entries.

Exam Context
This topic is likely to be tested in two main ways. You may be asked to identify the correct journal entry to post sales and
purchases transactions including sales tax. You may also be required to consider how sales tax affects the calculation of
amounts to be capitalised for non-current assets and the amount for trade receivables where discounts are offered.

Qualification Context
Financial Accounting introduces accounting for sales tax. More detailed rules and calculations relating to this area are
covered in the Fundamentals level paper, Taxation (F6).

7.1

7: SALES TAX

Overview
Output tax

Input tax

Accounting treatment

Sales tax

Irrecoverable sales tax

Discounts

7.2

7: SALES TAX

Introduction

1.1

This chapter is designed to enable you to prepare basic accounting entries for sales tax,
known in many countries as Value Added Tax (VAT).

Sales tax
1.2

A business' sales and purchases are often subject to sales tax. This is an indirect tax, as it
is not levied directly on the individual like personal income tax. Sales tax is collected by
traders who charge it on the goods they sell to the customer.
A business charges sales tax on its sales (output tax) and suffers sales tax on its
purchases (input tax). Typically, a business which is registered for sales tax only needs to
make a payment to the tax authorities of the net amount of sales tax (i.e. sales tax owed on
outputs less sales tax suffered on inputs).

Purchases
Goods into factory

Sales
Goods out of factory

(input tax)

(output tax)

1.3

A registered business shows:


(a)
(b)

1.4

items of income and expenditure net of sales tax;


trade receivables and trade payables gross of sales tax.

Illustration (all figures include sales tax at 15%).


Purchase raw materials
Sell finished product

$115.00
$287.50

Required
Calculate the amounts due to or from the sales tax authority.
$
Input tax
Output tax

The rate of sales tax will always be provided in an exam question.

7.3

7: SALES TAX

Accounting treatment

Lecture example 1
A business buys goods for $1,000 plus 15% sales tax. They then sell those goods for $1,500 +
15% sales tax.
The purchases will cost ($1,000 1.15) = $1,150
The sales will raise
($1,500 1.15) = $1,725
The sales tax payable to tax authorities will be:
Payable on outputs (sales)
Reclaimable on inputs (purchases)
Net sales tax to tax authorities

$
225.00
(150.00)
75.00

(15% $1,500)
(15% $1,000)

As the business is purely collecting the sales tax for the tax authorities, and is able to set off its
sales tax suffered it does not include sales tax as either an expense or income in the income
statement. The sales tax is accounted for when the transaction occurs.
Required
(a)

Post the double entry to the ledger account below.


$
1,000
150

Dr Purchases
Dr Sales tax control account
Cr Trade payables

$
1,150

Solution
(a)
Purchases (I/S)

Trade payables (B/S)

Sales tax control account (B/S)

7.4

7: SALES TAX
Points to note
Purchases

Trade payables
(b)

NET
GROSS

Post the double entry to the ledger account below.


$
1,725

Dr Trade receivables
Cr Sales
Cr Sales tax control account

$
1,500
225

Solution
Sales (I/S)

Trade receivables (B/S)

Sales tax control account (B/S)


$
Balance b/d
175

Points to note
Sales
Trade receivables

NET
GROSS

Irrecoverable sales tax

3.1

In some tax regimes, sales tax on certain inputs is never recoverable. For example, sales
tax on business entertaining or on cars may not be recoverable. In this case the tax is a
genuine expense of the business and is charged to the income statement or included in the
cost of an asset to be depreciated. For example, the double entry for buying a car where
the sales tax is irrecoverable would be:
Dr
Cr

Motor vehicles account


Cash account

Cost + sales tax


Cost + sales tax
7.5

7: SALES TAX

Sales tax and discounts

4.1

Many businesses offer discounts to their customers. There are two types:

Quick Quiz

trade discounts
settlement discounts

4.2

Sales tax is calculated on the amount after all discounts.

4.3

The calculation and accounting treatment of discounts is covered in Chapter 14.

Summary of Chapter 7

5.1

A business acts as a collecting agent for the tax authorities and charges sales tax (output
tax) on its sales and reclaims sales tax (input tax) on its purchases.

5.2

Sales and purchases are recorded at the net amount.

5.3

Sales tax may be charged at various rates, however the rate of sales tax will always be
provided in an exam question.

5.4

The effect of discounts on sales tax is covered in Chapter 14.

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 7

6.1

Recording a credit purchase with sales tax:


Dr
Dr
Cr

6.2

Purchases
net
Sales tax control account tax
Trade payables

gross

Recording a credit sale with sales tax:


Dr
Cr
Cr

Trade receivables
gross
Sales
net
Sales tax control account
tax

7.6

Chapter 7: Questions

7.7

7: QUESTIONS

7.1

Elmo is a trader registered for sales tax. All his sales and purchases carry sales tax at a rate of 15%. A
customer has just returned goods sold for $230 plus sales tax, the double entry for this transaction is
A

Debit payables $264.50, Credit sales tax $34.50, Credit sales $230

Debit sales $264.50, Credit trade receivables $264.50

Debit sales $230, Debit sales tax $34.50, Credit trade receivables $264.50

Debit sales $230, Debit irrecoverable sales tax $34.50, Credit trade receivables $264.50
(2 marks)

During 20X1 Fergus buys two vans and a car each costing $10,000 plus sales tax at 15%. The car will be
used 70% for business use and 30% personal use. He depreciates vehicles on a straight line basis, vans
over five years and cars over six years. What is his depreciation expense to the nearest $ for the year?
In the tax regime in which Fergus operates sales tax is only recoverable on items used wholly for
business purposes.
A

$5,917

$6,517

$6,100

$5,666

(2 marks)

7.8

Chapter 7: Answers

7.9

7: ANSWERS

7.1

7.2

Sales tax on the car is not recoverable as it is not wholly used for business purposes. Sales tax is
however recoverable on the vans.
$
Vans (2 $10,000) 5 =
4,000
Car ($10,000 115%) 6 =

1,917
5,917

END OF CHAPTER

7.10

Inventory

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Recognise the need for adjustments for inventory in preparing financial statements.

Record opening and closing inventory.

Identify the alternative methods of valuing inventory.

Understand and apply the IASB requirements for valuing inventories.

Recognise which costs should be included in valuing inventories.

Calculate the value of closing inventory using 'first in, first out' and 'average cost'.

Understand the use of continuous and period end inventory records.

Understand the impact of accounting concepts on the valuation of inventory.

Identify the impact of inventory valuation methods on profit and on assets.

Exam Context
Accounting for inventories and inventory valuation is a basic principle that affects any business. Examination questions
are likely to test your understanding of the terms cost and net realisable value. You should also expect calculations on
this area and be able to make adjustments for both opening and closing inventory.

Qualification Context
The Fundamentals level paper Management Accounting (F2) explores inventories in more detail. There you will look at
the classification of costs (for example, production versus non production and fixed versus variable) and you will also
cover detailed calculations on overhead absorption.

8.1

8: INVENTORY

Overview
Accounting adjustments

Inventory

Valuation

Net realisable value

Cost

Methods of estimating cost

FIFO

Effects on profit

AVCO

8.2

8:

INVENTORY

Introduction

1.1

For some businesses, for example manufacturing entities, inventory can be a significant
figure.

1.2

It impacts the financial statement in two ways:

1.3

(a)

Balance sheet:

a potentially large balance within Current Assets

(b)

Income statement:

opening and closing inventory have a direct


impact on cost of sales and therefore profits

Businesses must therefore ensure that their financial statements account for inventory
accurately in terms of:
(a)
(b)

the accounting adjustment


its valuation

Accounting adjustment

2.1

Inventory is generally accounted for as a year end adjustment via a journal entry.

2.2

Opening inventory
The trial balance produced by the entity at the end of the year will show an inventory figure.
This amount generally relates to the opening inventory i.e. the goods held by the business
at the beginning of the year.
Such goods will have been sold during the year. They are no longer an asset of the entity
but will form part of the costs that should be matched against sales revenue when
determining profit.
The accounting entry is:
Dr
Cr

2.3

Cost of sales (I/S)


Inventories (B/S)

Closing inventory
The goods held by the business at the end of the year must be included as an asset in the
balance sheet and within cost of sales in the income statement.
The accounting entry is:
Dr
Cr

Inventories (B/S)
Cost of sales (I/S)

8.3

8: INVENTORY
2.4

The inventories figure comprises two elements:


QUANTITY VALUATION

2.5

Quantity:

normally ascertained by inventory count at end of accounting period or


by continuous inventory records.

Valuation:

much more subjective, so guidance is provided in IAS 2.

Inventory overview
Inventory

Quantity

Continuous
Inventory records

x
Inventory
count

All costs to get


item to current
location in
current condition

Actual cost

Valuation

Cost

Lower of
and
NRV

Selling price
Less: completion costs
Less: selling costs

Deemed cost

FIFO

Valuation

3.1

The basic rule per IAS 2: Inventories is:

Average
Cost

'Inventories should be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.'
3.2

This is another example of prudence in presenting financial information.


(a)

If inventory is expected to be sold at a profit:


(i)
(ii)

(b)

value at cost
do not anticipate profit.

If inventory is expected to be sold at a loss:


(i)
(ii)

value at net realisable value


do provide for the future loss.

8.4

$
X
(X)
(X)
X

8:

Cost

4.1

The cost of an item of inventory includes:

INVENTORY

For example:
purchase price
import duties

Cost of purchase
But not:
sales tax
trade discounts

Relating to productions:

direct labour

direct/variable overheads

an allocation of fixed
overheads (based on
normal level of activity)

Costs of conversion
Section 5.4

Other costs incurred in bringing


the inventories to their present
location and condition

For example:

carriage inwards

Lecture example 1

Exam standard question worth 2 marks

According to IAS 2: Inventories, which of the following should not be included in valuing the
inventories of an entity?
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Labour costs
Transport costs to deliver goods to customers
Administrative overheads
Depreciation on factory machine

A
B
C
D

All four items


1 only
2 and 3 only
2, 3, and 4 only

Solution

8.5

8: INVENTORY

Net realisable value (NRV)

5.1

The net realisable value of an item is essentially its net selling proceeds after all costs have
been deducted.

5.2

It is calculated as:
$
X
(X)
(X)
X

Estimated selling price


Less: estimated costs of completion
Less: estimated selling and distribution costs

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

Jessie is trying to value her inventory. She has the following information available:
$
35
20
12
1

Selling price
Costs incurred to date
Cost of work to complete item
Selling costs per item
Required
What is the net realisable value of Jessie's inventory?

Workings

No netting off
5.3

The IAS 2 rule 'lower of cost and net realisable value' should be applied as far as
possible on an item by item (or line by line) basis.

8.6

8:

INVENTORY

Illustration
5.4

Suppose an entity has four items of inventories on hand at the year end. Their costs and
NRVs are as follows:
Inventory item
Cost
$
27
14
43
29
113

1
2
3
4

NRV
$
32
8
55
40
135

Lower of cost
and NRV
$
27
8
43
29
107

It would be incorrect to compare total cost of $113 with total NRV of $135 and state
inventories as $113.
A loss on item 2 of $6 can be foreseen and should therefore be recognised.
The comparison should be made for each item of inventory and thus a value of $107 would
be attributed to inventories.
This would be accounted for by the journal entry:
Dr
Cr

$
107

Inventories (B/S)
Cost of sales (I/S)

$
107

Theoretical methods of estimating cost

Issue
6.1
Section 4.3

6.2

If various batches of inventories have been purchased at different times during the year and
at different prices, it may be impossible to determine precisely which items are still held at
the year end and therefore what the actual purchase cost of the goods was. IAS 2 therefore
allows an entity to approximate the cost of its inventories. There are two methods
examinable at Paper F3:

First in, first out (FIFO)


Average cost

(a)

FIFO
Under FIFO it is assumed that:
(i)
(ii)

(b)

first goods purchased/produced will be the first to be sold


remaining inventories are the most recent purchases/production.

Average Cost (AVCO)


There are two average costs available:
(i)

Simple average cost


The cost of all purchases/production during the year is divided by the total
number of units purchased

8.7

8: INVENTORY
(ii)

Weighted average cost


The weighted average of the cost of similar items is recalculated each time a
new item is purchased/produced during the period (IAS 2 requires the weighted
average to be used)

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

On 1 January 20X7 a company held 200 units of finished goods valued at $10 each. During
January the following transactions took place.
Date

Units purchased

Cost per unit

10 January

300

$10.85

20 January

350

$11.50

25 January

250

$13.00

Sales during January were as follows:


Date

Units sold

Sales price per unit

14 January

280

$18.00

21 January

400

$18.00

28 January

80

$18.00

Required
Determine the valuation of closing inventories and cost of sales using:
(a)
(b)

FIFO
Weighted average cost

Solution
(a)

Closing inventories (FIFO)


1.1.X7
Sales

Cost of sales (FIFO)

8.8

Purchases
10.1.X7
20.1.X7

25.1.X7

8:
(b)

Closing inventories and cost of sales (AVCO)


Units
1.1.X7

b/f

10.1.X7

Purchase

14.1.X7

Sale

20.1.X7

Purchase

21.1.X7

Sale

25.1.X7

Purchase

28.1.X7

Sale

Cost
$

Average
Unit Cost
$

Workings

Advantages and disadvantages


6.3

INVENTORY

FIFO:

more realistic value on balance sheet.

Average cost: can be complex as weighted average is required by IAS 2.

8.9

Total
Cost
$

Cost of
Sales
$

8: INVENTORY

Valuation effects on profit

7.1

All of the inventory valuation methods affect profits. Using the FIFO, and average cost
examples above, this can be illustrated in an income statement.
FIFO
$
Sales (760 $18)
Cost of sales
Opening inventories
Purchases
Closing inventories

2,000
10,530
(4,285)

2,000
10,530
(4,160)
8,245
5,435

Gross profit
7.2

$
13,680

Weighted average
$
$
13,680

8,370
5,310

The only figure that varies is the closing inventories, the result being quite different profit
figures.
This re-emphasises the significance of inventory valuation in the preparation of financial
statements.

Effects in times of changing prices


7.3

In the above example, the purchase price of inventories was rising during the period. Notice
that when prices are rising:
FIFO will tend to give higher inventory values and higher profits.

Summary of Chapter 8

8.1

Inventories should be valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

8.2

The cost of inventory includes the cost of purchase, costs of conversion and any other
costs necessary to bring the inventory to its present location and condition.

8.3

Methods available to estimate the cost of inventories are first in, first out (FIFO) and
average cost.

8.4

In times of rising prices, using FIFO will mean the financial statements show higher
inventory values and higher profits.

8.5

Net realisable value is the estimated selling price less the costs to completion and any
selling and distribution costs.

8.10

Chapter 8: Questions

8.11

8: QUESTIONS

8.1

An item of inventory could be sold for $100 after it has been modified at a cost of $21. The company
incurs selling and distribution costs of 5% of selling price on each article sold. The cost is $45 per unit
excluding carriage inwards of $2 and production overheads of $17 per unit.
Following the rules in IAS 2 at what valuation should this item be included in the inventories of the
company? $
(2 marks)

8.2

Harrow Co sells one line of inventory. At the year end it has 200 units in inventory which originally cost
$10 per unit and had incurred delivery costs of $120 in total. They expect these goods to sell for $13 per
unit. Harrow Co incurs selling costs amounting to 10% of the selling price on all its sales.
In the balance sheet these items should be valued at:

8.3

$2,000

$2,080

$2,120

$2,600

(2 marks)

Lamp makes the following purchases in the year.


(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

21.01.X9
30.04.X9
31.07.X9
01.09.X9
11.11.X9

Units
100
300
40
60
80

$/unit
12.00
12.50
12.80
13.00
13.50

Total ($)
1,200
3,750
512
780
1,080

At the year end 200 units are in inventory but eight are damaged and are only worth $10 per unit. These
are identified as having been part of the 11.11.X9 delivery. Lamp operates a FIFO system for valuing
inventories.
The figure for inventories at 31 December 20X9 is:

8.4

$2,524

$2,594

$2,622

$2,700

(2 marks)

Inventories
At the year end, Biggs Co holds the following inventories:
(1)

10 units of L in a completed state; each unit cost $160 to make and has a selling price of $200.

(2)

45 units of M in a partly completed state. Costs to date have amounted to $240 per unit and
completion costs will amount to $90 per unit. Selling price per unit is $360.

(3)

60 units of N purchased for $40 each. These sell at $56 each and would now cost $48 each if
additional units were bought.

(4)

50 units of O costing $10 each. These cannot be sold unless they are modified at a cost of $2 per
unit. After that, the selling price will be $8.

The companys selling costs are 25% of the selling price.


Required
Calculate the value of inventories that would be shown on the balance sheet at the end of the year.

8.12

8: QUESTIONS

8.5

T Bag
T Bag commenced business as a tea importer on 1 January 20X5. His purchases and sales during his
first six months of trading are set out below:
Tonnes
1 January
15 February
27 February
31 March
16 April
30 April
30 May
8 June
28 June

30
20

Purchases
Price per tonne
$
700
750

Total price
$
21,000
15,000

40
25

820
880

32,800
22,000

35
10

900
1,050

31,500
10,500
132,800

Tonnes

Sales
Proceeds
$

40

36,000

35

35,000

70

77,000
148,000

Required
Calculate the value of closing inventories and produce a trading account for the 6 months ended 30 June
20X5 assuming:
(a)
(b)

Inventories are valued on a FIFO basis


Inventories are valued on a weighted average basis

8.13

8: QUESTIONS

8.14

Chapter 8: Answers

8.15

8: ANSWERS

8.1

$64

8.2

NRV = 100 21 (5% 100) = $74


Cost = 45 + 2 + 17 = $64
Lower of cost and NRV = $64
$
2,000
120
2,120

200 @ $10 =
Delivery costs
Cost/ unit = $10.60
Net realisable value per unit = $13 90% = $11.70
valued at cost
8.3

B
Inventories =

8.4

8
72
60
40
20
200

@ $10
@ $13.50
@ $13
@ $12.80
@ $12.50

$
80
972
780
512
250
2,594

=
=
=
=
=

Inventories
The inventories total on the balance sheet would be: $12,200 ($1,500 + $8,100 + $2,400 + $200).
Workings
(1)

1 unit of L would be valued at:


Selling price
Less selling costs (25%)
NRV

$
200
50
150

Cost

160

NRV is lower and so 10 units of L are valued at $1,500


(2)

1 unit of M would be valued at:

Selling price
Less: Selling costs (25%)
Costs to completion
NRV

90
90

Cost

$
360
180
180
240

NRV is lower and so 45 units of M are valued at $8,100


(3)

1 unit of N would be valued at:


Selling price
Less selling costs (25%)
NRV

$
56
14
42

Cost

40

Cost is lower and 60 units of N are valued at $2,400


Replacement cost is irrelevant.

8.16

8: ANSWERS

(4)

1 unit of O would be valued at:


$
Selling price
Less: Selling costs (25%)
Costs of modification

$
8

2
2

NRV
Cost

4
10

NRV is lower and so 50 units of O are valued at $200


8.5

T Bag
Trading account for the 6 months ended 30 June 20X5
FIFO

Weighted
average
$
148,000

$
148,000

Sales
Cost of sales
Purchases
Closing inventories (W)

132,800
(15,000)

132,800
(13,245)
(117,800)
30,200

Gross profit

(119,555)
28,445

Workings
(W1) FIFO method
Purchases in tonnes
Sales in tonnes:
27 Feb
30 Apr
28 June
Inventories at 30 June 20X5
Cost per tonne

1 Jan
30

15 Feb
20

(30)

(10)
(10)

31 Mar
40

16 Apr
25

30 May
35

8 June
10

(25)
(15)

(25)

(30)
5
$900

10
$1,050

$4,500

$10,500

Valuation
Total valuation $4,500 + $10,500 = $15,000
(W2) Weighted average method
Tonnes
1 Jan
15 Feb
27 Feb
31 March
16 April
30 April
30 May
8 June
28 June

30
20
50
(40)
10
40
25
75
(35)
40
35
10
85
(70)
15

Cost
$
700
750

820
880

900
1,050

8.17

Average
Unit Cost
$
720

827

883

Total
Cost
$
21,000
15,000
36,000
(28,800)
7,200
32,800
22,000
62,000
(28,945)
33,055
31,500
10,500
75,055
(61,810)
13,245

Cost of Sales
$

28,800

28,945

61,810
119,555

8: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

8.18

Tangible non-current
assets

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Define non-current assets and recognise the difference between current and non-current assets.

Explain the difference between capital and revenue items and classify expenditure accordingly.

Prepare ledger entries to record the acquisition, disposal, depreciation and accumulated depreciation of noncurrent assets.

Calculate and record profits or losses on disposal of non-current assets in the income statement.

Record the revaluation of a non-current asset and calculate its subsequent depreciation and profit or loss on
disposal.

Illustrate how non-current asset balances and movements are disclosed in company financial statements.

Explain the purpose and function of an asset register.

Understand and explain the purpose of depreciation.

Calculate the charge for depreciation using the straight line and reducing methods, identifying when each is
appropriate.

Calculate the adjustments to depreciation necessary if changes are made in the estimated useful life and/or
residual value of a non-current asset.

Record depreciation in the income statement and balance sheet.

Exam Context
Tangible non-current assets and depreciation are an important part of the F3 syllabus and you should expect several
questions on this area. Questions are likely to focus on areas such as calculating depreciation and asset values (both on
assets held at historic cost and revalued amounts), profits or losses on disposal of assets and the components that can
be included in the cost of a non-current asset.

Qualification Context
The knowledge covered in this chapter is developed in the Fundamentals level paper Financial Reporting (F7) where
you will deal with more complex issues such as impairments of non-current assets and leasing.

9.1

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Overview

Capital versus revenue


expenditure

Cost

Tangible non-current
assets

Revaluations

Depreciation

Straight line method

Disposals

Reducing balance
depreciation

9.2

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Introduction

1.1

The purchase of a non-current asset is often a significant cost to a business which will have
a large impact on its financial statements.

1.2

It is important therefore that this expenditure is accounted for appropriately.

Non-current assets

Definition
2.1

Non-current assets are assets which are intended to be used by the business on a
continuing basis and include both tangible and intangible assets.
Intangible non-current assets are covered in Chapter 10.

2.2

The accounting treatment of tangible non-current assets is covered by IAS 16: Property,
Plant and equipment.
Tangible non-current assets are defined as those which:
(a)

are held for use in the production or supply of goods or services or for administrative
purposes; and

(b)

are expected to be used during more than one period.

Lecture example 1

Idea generation

Required
What examples of tangible non-current assets can you identify?

Solution
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

9.3

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Capital versus revenue expenditure


2.3
Section 1.3

2.4

(a)

Capital expenditure:

results in the acquisition, replacement or improvement


of non-current assets.

(b)

Revenue expenditure:

for the trade of the business, or


to repair, maintain and service non-current assets.

Capital expenditure results in the appearance of a non-current asset in the balance sheet
of the business.
Revenue expenditure results in an expense in the income statement.

Cost
2.5

Tangible non-current assets should initially be recorded at cost.


Cost includes:

Purchase price:

Directly attributable costs to bring the asset to its intended location and ready to
use. These include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

excluding sales tax and trade discounts but including import


duties

Initial delivery and handling costs


Installation and assembly costs
Costs of testing whether the asset is working properly
Professional fees

The following costs may not be included:


(a)
(b)
(c)
2.6

The cost of maintenance contracts


Administration and general overhead costs
Staff training costs

The asset can then be kept at cost and depreciated or the entity may choose to revalue its
tangible non-current assets.

Lecture example 2

Exam standard worth 2 marks

On 10 December 20X7 an entity bought a machine.


The breakdown on the invoice showed:
$
20,000
200
900
21,100

Cost of machine
Delivery costs
One-year maintenance contract
Further installation costs of $500 were also incurred.

9.4

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


Required
At what amount should the machine be capitalised in the entity's records?
A
B
C
D

$20,000
$20,700
$20,200
$21,600

Solution

Depreciation

3.1

Tangible non-current assets are used in the business to generate the income shown in the
income statement.
Assets will eventually be worn out (used up) and so there is a cost of generating income.
This cost should be shown in the income statement to 'match' against the income.
This is called depreciation.

3.2

Depreciation results in the non-current asset being systematically charged to the income
statement over several accounting periods in recognition of the fact that the asset will
contribute to the income-generating activities of each of these periods.
A formal definition is given by the accounting standard, IAS 16:
"the systematic allocation of the depreciable amount of an asset over its useful life."
'Depreciable amount'
'Residual value'

3.3

=
=

cost/revalued amount residual value


the amount the asset is expected to be sold for at the end of its
useful life (scrap value).

Land normally has an unlimited useful life and is therefore not depreciated. Buildings have
a limited life and, therefore, are depreciable assets.

9.5

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Methods of depreciation

4.1

There are two main methods for calculating depreciation:


(a)
(b)

Straight line method


Reducing balance method

Straight line method

5.1

The depreciation charge is the same every year.

Formula
5.2

Depreciation =

cost residual value


useful life (years)

or (Cost Residual value) %

where:
Residual value = expected proceeds/scrap value at the end of the asset's useful life.
Useful life
5.3

= the number of years the business expects to make use of the asset.

This method is suitable for assets which are used up evenly over their useful life.

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

A business buys a machine for $2,500. It is expected to have a useful life of three years after
which time it will have a scrap value of $250.
Required
(a)

Calculate the annual depreciation charge.

(b)

Calculate the cost, accumulated depreciation and net book value (NBV) for each year of the
asset's life. Note: NBV = cost accumulated depreciation to date.

Solution
(a)

(b)
Year

Cost
$

1
2
3

9.6

Accumulated
depreciation
$

NBV
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Reducing balance depreciation

6.1

This method is suitable for those assets which generate more revenue in earlier years than
in later years; for example a machine which may become progressively less efficient as it
gets older.
Under this method the depreciation charge will be higher in the earlier years and reduce
over time.

Formula
6.2

Depreciation

Depreciation rate (%) Net Book Value (NBV)

where:

net book value (NBV) = cost accumulated depreciation to date

Note:

This method does not take account of any residual value, since the NBV under this
method will never reach zero. The depreciation rate percentage will be provided in
the question.

Lecture example 4

Preparation question

A business buys a machine costing $6,000. The depreciation rate is 40% on a reducing balance
basis.
Required
Calculate depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation and net book value of the asset for the
first three years.

Solution
Year

NBV b/d

Depreciation
rate

$
1
2
3

9.7

Depreciation
expense
$

Accumulated
depreciation
$

NBV c/d
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Accounting for depreciation

Dual effect
7.1

Depreciation has a dual effect which needs to be accounted for:


(a)
(b)

7.2

It reduces the value of the asset on the face of the balance sheet.
It is an expense in the income statement.

The asset remains at its original cost in the asset account.


Two accounts are set up to record depreciation:
Dr
Cr

Depreciation expense
Accumulated depreciation

Accumulated depreciation account


7.3

(a)

Used to provide for the reduction in value of the asset.

(b)

Reduces original cost of the asset on the balance sheet. (The balance on the account
is offset against the cost account for the corresponding asset.)

(c)

Separate account kept for each class of asset (eg motor vehicles, buildings, plant and
machinery).

Lecture example 5

Preparation question

Required
Using the information in Lecture example 3, show:
(a)
(b)
(c)

The journal entry which would have been written at the end of the first year.
The treatment of depreciation for all years in the relevant ledger accounts.
The relevant income statement and balance sheet extracts for each year.

Solution
(a)

Journal entry
Debit
$

9.8

Credit
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


(b)

Machine (B/S)

Depreciation expense (I/S)

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)

(c)

Income statement (extracts)


Year 1
$
Expenses

9.9

Year 2
$

Year 3
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


Balance sheet (extracts)
Cost
$

Accumulated
depreciation
$

Net book
value
$

(Year 1)
(Year 2)
(Year 3)

Disposal of non-current assets

Profit or loss on disposal


8.1

When a non-current asset is disposed, of its net book value needs to be removed from the
balance sheet.
The sales proceeds received are unlikely to be exactly the same as the asset's net book
value and so a profit or loss on disposal will arise.
If:
Sales proceeds > NBV profit on disposal
Sales proceeds < NBV loss on disposal
This is not a 'true' profit or loss, but rather a book adjustment to reflect the fact that the
depreciation charged over the asset's life wasn't completely accurate.

Accounting treatment
8.2

Everything to do with the disposal is transferred to a Disposal Account.


Steps:
(1)

Remove the cost of the asset:


Dr
Cr

(2)

Disposal account
Non-current asset

Remove the accumulated depreciation charged to date:


Dr
Cr

Accumulated depreciation
Disposal account

Note: Steps (1) and (2) have effectively transferred the NBV of the asset to the disposal
account.

9.10

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


(3)

Account for the sales proceeds:


Dr
Cr

(4)

Cash
Disposal account

Balance off disposal account to find the profit or loss on disposal.

A gain on disposal is shown in the income statement as sundry income, a loss as an


expense.

Lecture example 6

Preparation question

The machine costing $6,000 in Lecture example 4 is sold in year 3 for $3,000. No depreciation is
charged in the year of disposal.
Required
(a)
(b)

Calculate the profit or loss on disposal of the machine.


Complete the ledger accounts to show how the disposal would be accounted for.

Solution
(a)

(b)
Machine (B/S)
Bal b/d

$
6,000

9.11

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


Accumulated depreciation (B/S)
$
Bal b/d

$
3,840

Disposal account
$

Part exchange allowance


8.3

Instead of receiving sales proceeds as cash, a part exchange allowance could be offered
against the cost of a replacement asset:
Dr
Cr

New asset cost


Disposal account

The part exchange allowance takes the place of proceeds in the disposals account.

Lecture example 7

Preparation question

Assume in Lecture example 6 that instead of cash proceeds of $3,000, there is a part exchange
allowance of $3,000 on a replacement machine costing $10,000.
Required
(a)
(b)
(c)

Calculate the profit or loss on disposal of the machine.


Calculate the amount of cash paid for the new machine.
Complete the ledger accounts to show both the disposal and the acquisition.

9.12

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Solution
(a)

(b)

(c)
Old machine (B/S)
Bal b/d

$
6,000

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


$
Bal b/d

$
3,840

New machine (B/S)


$

Disposal account
$

9.13

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Revaluations

9.1

If an entity owns a property it may notice that its value increases over time.

9.2

IAS 16 requires tangible non-current assets to initially be recorded at cost. The entity can
then either keep the asset at cost (and depreciate it) or choose to revalue it (depreciation is
still required).
This is a choice of accounting policy.

9.3

If an entity chooses a policy of revaluation then all items in the same class of assets must be
revalued.
Examples of classes of assets are:

9.4

land and buildings


plant and machinery
motor vehicles

Revaluations must be carried out sufficiently often so that the assets carrying value is not
materially different from its market value.

Steps and accounting treatment


9.5

(1)

Adjust cost account to revalued amount.

(2)

Remove accumulated depreciation charged on the asset to date.

(3)

Put the balance to the revaluation reserve.

Note: The balance posted to the revaluation reserve will equal the new revalued amount
less the previous net book value.
9.6

The required journal is:


Dr
Dr
Cr

9.7

Non-current asset cost


Accumulated depreciation
Revaluation reserve

Depreciation should now be based on the revalued amount.

9.14

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Lecture example 8

Preparation question

A building costing $100,000 on which depreciation of $20,000 has been charged is to be revalued
to $150,000.
Required
(a)

Show the double entry to record the revaluation and make the postings to the ledger
accounts.

(b)

What would be the depreciation charge for the year if the building has a remaining useful life
of 40 years?

Solution
(a)

Building (B/S)
$

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


$

9.15

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


Revaluation reserve (B/S)
$

(b)

10 Summary of Chapter 9
10.1 Capital expenditure results in a non-current asset being shown on the balance sheet.
Revenue expenditure, such as repairs and maintenance, is shown as an expense in the
income statement.
10.2 Tangible non-current assets should initially be recorded at cost. This includes the
purchase price of the item plus any directly attributable costs to bring the item to its
intended location and ready to use.
10.3 Depreciation is an expense charged on the asset each year to reflect the using up of the
asset. Depreciation is usually calculated on a straight line or reducing balance basis.
10.4 On disposal of a non-current asset the sales proceeds are compared to the net book value
of the asset in order to calculate the profit or loss on disposal. Where an asset is given in
part exchange for another asset, the part exchange allowance takes the place of the sales
proceeds.
10.5 An entity may choose to revalue its assets rather than hold them at cost this is a choice
of accounting policy. Where an entity revalues, it must revalue all assets in the same
class and the depreciation charge will now be based on the revalued amount.

9.16

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

11 Double Entry Summary for Chapter 9


11.1 Depreciation adjustment:
Dr
Cr

Depreciation expense (I/S)


Accumulated depreciation (B/S)

11.2 Disposal of a non-current asset (four steps):


(1)

Remove the cost of the asset:


Dr
Cr

(2)

Remove the accumulated depreciation charged to date:


Dr
Cr

(3)

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


Disposal account (I/S)

Account for the sales proceeds:


Dr
Cr

(4)

Disposal account (I/S)


Non-current assets (B/S)

Cash (B/S)
Disposal account (I/S)

Balance off the disposal account to determine the profit or loss on disposal.

11.3 Revaluation of a non-current asset:


Dr
Dr
Cr

Non-current asset cost (B/S)


Accumulated depreciation (B/S)
Revaluation reserve (B/S)

9.17

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

9.18

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Additional Notes

9.19

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

12 Depreciation revisited
12.1 Depreciation is charged to allocate the wearing out of an asset (depreciable amount) to the
income statement over its useful life.
There are two main depreciation methods available:
straight line
reducing balance

Section 3.12

12.2 The useful life of an item of property, plant and equipment should be reviewed at least every
financial year-end and, if expectations are significantly different from previous estimates, the
depreciation charge for current and future periods should be revised.
This is achieved by writing the net book value off over the asset's revised remaining useful
life.

Lecture example 9

Preparation question

1.1.X1

Asset cost $40,000


Estimated useful life five years
No residual value

1.1.X3

Total useful life revised to four years.

Required
Calculate the depreciation charge, accumulated depreciation and NBV for each year of the asset's
life (year end 31 December).

Solution
Depreciation Accumulated
charge
depreciation
$
$
20X1
20X2
20X3
20X4

9.20

NBV
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Review of depreciation method


Section 3.7-3.9

12.3 The depreciation method should be reviewed at least every financial year-end and, if there
has been a significant change in the expected pattern of the asset's use, the method should
be changed.
This is achieved by writing the net book amount off over the remaining useful life, using the
revised method.

Lecture example 10

Preparation question

1.1.X1

Asset cost $40,000


Residual value $1,500
Useful life five years
Depreciation: 25% reducing balance

1.1.X3

Change depreciation method to straight line

Required
Calculate the depreciation charge, accumulated depreciation and NBV for each year of the assets
life (year ended 31 December).

Solution

Depreciation Accumulated
charge
depreciation
$
$
20X1
20X2
20X3
20X4
20X5

9.21

NBV
$

9: TANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

9.22

Chapter 9: Questions

9.23

9: QUESTIONS

Data for Questions 9.1 and 9.2


Bungo Co purchases a car for its managing director, which would cost $17,000, by paying $1,000 cash, and
trading in an old vehicle. The old vehicle had a net book value of $15,500 immediately before the trade in took
place.
9.1

9.2

What is the effect of the above transaction on the profit for the year in respect of the disposal of the old
vehicle?
A

Reduce profit by $1,500

Increase profit by $1,500

Reduce profit by $500

Increase profit by $500

(2 marks)

Bungo Co charges depreciation at 10% per annum, with a full years charge in the year of acquisition.
What will the annual depreciation charge on the new vehicle be? $

9.3

(2 marks)

A company held property, plant and equipment at 31 December 20X5 with a net book value of $22,700.
During 20X6 items with a net book value of $2,100 were sold, realising a profit of $700. The depreciation
charge in the 20X6 income statement was $4,300. Items with a book value of $15,200 were revalued to
$21,250. At 31 December 20X6 the companys balance sheet showed the net book value of property,
plant and equipment as $44,100.
What was the cost of new property, plant and equipment acquired during 20X6?

9.4

$13,150

$17,550

$22,050

$21,750

(2 marks)

Nick
Nick started trading on 1 January 20X8 and bought equipment for his business as follows:
1 January 20X8

Purchased a cutting machine for $4,960. The estimated useful life of the
machine is eight years, after which it will have no resale value.

2 January 20X8

Purchased a car for $6,800.

1 March 20X8

Purchased a van for $3,800. This has an estimated useful life of four years,
after which Nick believes he could sell it for $200.

1 May 20X8

Purchased office furniture costing $5,400. This has an estimated useful life of
10 years with no resale value.

Depreciation for all assets, except the car, is to be calculated on the straight line basis, time apportioned
where the asset is owned for part of a year. The car is to be depreciated at 40% per annum on the
reducing balance basis.
Required
For the years ending 31 December 20X8 and 31 December 20X9, prepare relevant extracts from the
financial statements, together with the appropriate ledger accounts.

9.24

9: QUESTIONS

9.5

Eggo
On 1 January 20X4 Eggo Co, a manufacturer, acquired two identical grinding machines at a cost of
$10,000 each, and a duplicating machine at a cost of $3,000. The grinding machines are depreciated at
the rate of 30% per annum on a reducing balance basis, and the duplicating machine, which has an
estimated life of 10 years and a residual value of $500, is depreciated on a straight line basis. On
1 January 20X5 one of the grinding machines was sold for $5,000 and replaced by a new one costing
$12,000.
Required
Prepare the relevant ledger accounts dealing with the non-current assets, depreciation and the disposal
for the years to 31 December 20X4 and 31 December 20X5, respectively.

9.6

Hopkins
During 20X4 Hopkins gave his old van in part-exchange for a new van. The old van had cost $4,000 and
had accumulated depreciation of $2,400 at the date of exchange. Hopkins received a part-exchange
allowance of $1,800 and made a cash payment of $6,200 for the new van. Depreciation is over four years
on a straight line basis.
Required
(a)
(b)

Calculate the profit or loss on disposal of the old van.


Calculate the depreciation expense for the year ended 20X4.

9.25

9: QUESTIONS

9.26

Chapter 9: Answers

9.27

9: ANSWERS

9.1

9.2

$1,700

Profit on disposal = (17,000 1,000) 15,500 = $500

10% $17,000 = $1,700


9.3

B/d
Revaluation
(21,250-15,200)
Additions

Property, plant and equipment (NBV)


$
22,700
Disposals
6,050
Depreciation

$
2,100
4,300

C/d

?
50,500

44,100
50,500

additions = $21,750
9.4

Nick
Income statement for the year ended 31 December .... (extract)
Depreciation Expense
Machine
Car
Van
Furniture

20X8
$
620
2,720
750
360
4,450

20X9
$
620
1,632
900
540
3,692

Accumulated
depreciation
$
620
2,720
750
360
4,450

Net Book
Value
$
4,340
4,080
3,050
5,040
16,510

Accumulated
depreciation
$
1,240
4,352
1,650
900
8,142

Net Book
Value
$
3,720
2,448
2,150
4,500
12,818

Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X8 (extract)


Non-current assets

Cost

Machine
Car
Van
Furniture

$
4,960
6,800
3,800
5,400
20,960

Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X9 (extract)


Non-current assets

Cost

Machine
Car
Van
Furniture

$
4,960
6,800
3,800
5,400
20,960
Machine (B/S)

1.1.X8

Bank

$
4,960

9.28

9: ANSWERS

Machine Accumulated Depreciation (B/S)


31.12.X8 bal c/d

$
620

31.12.X8

620
31.12.X9 bal c/d

1,240
1,240

Depn expense:
machine

1.1.X9
31.12.X9

bal b/d
Depn expense
: machine

1.1.Y0

bal b/d

$
620
620
620
620
1,240
1,240

Car (B/S)
2.1.X8

Bank

$
6,800
Car Accumulated Depreciation (B/S)

31.12.X8 bal c/d


31.12.X9 bal c/d

$
2,720
2,720
4,352
4,352

31.12.X8

Depn expense: car

1.1.X9
31.12.X9

bal b/d
Dep'n expense: car

1.1.Y0

bal b/d

$
2,720
2,720
2,720
1,632
4,352
4,352

Van (B/S)
1.3.X8

Bank

$
3,800
Van Accumulated Depreciation (B/S)

31.12.X8 bal c/d


31.12.X9 bal c/d

$
750
750
1,650
1,650

31.12.X8

Depn expense: van

1.1.X9
31.12.X9

bal b/d
Depn expense: van

1.1.Y0

bal b/d

Furniture (B/S)
1.5.X8

Bank

$
5,400

9.29

$
750
750
750
900
1,650
1,650

9: ANSWERS

Furniture Accumulated Depreciation (B/S)


$
360

31.12.X8 bal c/d

31.12.X8

360
31.12.X9 bal c/d

900
900

Depn expense: furniture


furniture

1.1.X9
31.12.X9

bal b/d
Depn expense:
furniture

1.1.Y0

bal b/d

$
360
360
360
540
900
900

Depreciation Expense : Machine (I/S)


31.12.X8
31.12.X9

$
620
620

Accd depn: machine


Accd depn: machine

31.12.X8
31.12.X9

I/S
I/S

$
620
620

Depreciation Expense : Car (I/S)


31.12.X8
31.12.X9

$
2,720
1,632

Accd depn: car


Accd depn: car

31.12.X8
31.12.X9

I/S
I/S

$
2,720
1,632

Depreciation Expense : Van (I/S)


31.12.X8
31.12.X9

$
750
900

Accd depn: van


Accd depn: van

31.12.X8
31.12.X9

I/S
I/S

$
750
900

Depreciation Expense : Furniture (I/S)


31.12.X8
31.12.X9

Accd depn: furniture


Accd depn: furniture

$
360
540

31.12.X8
31.12.X9

I/S
I/S

$
360
540

Workings: Depreciation charge


20X8
$
620

Machine

4,960 8

Car

6,800 40%

Van

(3,800 200) 4 = 900


900

(6,800 2,720) 40%


(note: reducing balance method)

1,632

10
= 750
12

(10 months)
Furniture

2,720

20X9
$
620

(5,400)

8
(8 months)
12

750

(full year)

900

360

(full year)

540

9.30

9: ANSWERS

9.5

Eggo
Grinding machines (B/S)
$
20,000

1.1.X4

Bank

1.1.X5
1.1.X5

Balance b/d
Bank

20,000
12,000
32,000

1.1.X6

Balance c/d

22,000

31.12.X4 Balance c/d


1.1.X5
Disposals
31.12.X5 Balance c/d

$
20,000
10,000
22,000
32,000

Grinding machines Accumulated Depreciation (B/S)


$
6,000

31.12.X4 Balance c/d


1.1.X5
Disposals
31.12.X5 Balance c/d

31.12.X4 Dep'n expense (W)

3,000
8,700
11,700

1.1.X5
Balance b/d
31.12.X5 Dep'n expense (W)
1.1.X6

Balance b/d

$
6,000
6,000
5,700
11,700
8,700

Duplicating machine (B/S)


1.1.X4

Bank

$
3,000

1.1.X5
1.1.X5

Balance b/d
Balance b/d

3,000
3,000

31.12.X4 Balance c/d

$
3,000

31.12.X5 Balance c/d

3,000

Duplicating machine Accumulated Deprecation


31.12.X4

Balance c/d

31.12.X5

Balance c/d

$
250
250
500
500

$
250
250

31.12.X4

Depreciation expense

1.1.X5
31.12.X5

Balance b/d
Depreciation expense

250
250
500

1.1.X6

Balance b/d

500

Depreciation expense (I/S)


31.12.X4 Acc dep'n grinding machines
31.12.X4 Acc dep'n duplicating machine
31.12.X5 Acc dep'n grinding machines
31.12.X5 Acc dep'n duplicating machine

$
6,000
250
6,250
5,700
250
5,950

9.31

$
31.12.X4 I/S

6,250
6,250

31.12.X5 I/S

5,950
5,950

9: ANSWERS

Disposal account (I/S)


1.1.X5

Grinding machines

$
10,000

1.1.X5 Bank
1.1.X5 Acc Dep'n grinding machine
31.12.X5 I/S loss on disposal

10,000

$
5,000
3,000
2,000
10,000

Working
Depreciation charge
Year ended 31 December

20X4
$
6,000
250

Grinding machines ($20,000 30%)


Duplicating machine ($3,000 $500) 10
Grinding machines
Machine 1 ($10,000 $3,000) 30%
Machine 2 ($12,000 30%)
Duplicating machine

6,250
9.6

20X5
$

2,100
3,600
250
5,950

Hopkins
(a)

$200 profit
Working
Disposal account (I/S)
$
4,000
200

Cost
Profit on disposal

4,200

Accumulated depreciation
Part exchange allowance

$
2,400
1,800
4,200

Or alternatively:
"Proceeds" part-exchange allowance
Net book value ($4,000 $2,400)
Profit on disposal
(b)

$
1,800
(1,600)
200

$2,000
$
8,000

Cost of new van to be depreciated


($6,200 + $1,800)
Depreciate over four years

2,000

END OF CHAPTER

9.32

Intangible non-current
assets

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Recognise the difference between tangible and intangible non-current assets.

Identify types of intangible assets.

Identify the definition and treatment of research and development costs in accordance with IFRS.

Calculate amounts to be capitalised as development expenditure or to be expensed from given information.

Calculate and account for the charge for amortisation and explain its purpose.

Exam Context
Intangible non-current assets are a smaller part of the syllabus than tangible non-current assets, however you should
still expect this area to be tested. Questions are likely to focus on the difference between tangible and intangible assets,
the accounting treatment for research and the capitalisation criteria for development expenditure. You should also be
confident in calculating amortisation.

Qualification Context
The knowledge covered in this chapter forms a platform which will be built on in the Fundamentals level paper Financial
Reporting (F7). There you will cover internally generated intangible assets and goodwill.

10.1

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Overview

Intangible non-current
assets

Research

Development expenditure

Accounting treatment

Accounting treatment

Amortisation

10.2

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Definition

1.1

An intangible non-current asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical


substance.

1.2

The following are examples of intangible assets:

Development expenditure
Goodwill
Concessions, patents, licences, trade marks.

The Paper F3 syllabus only requires knowledge of the accounting treatment of research and
development expenditure.

Research and development expenditure

2.1

Many companies, such as pharmaceutical companies, spend huge amounts on research


and development every year in order to maintain or enhance their competitive position.

2.2

Companies need to account for these costs and whilst the credit entry will be recorded as a
current liability, the question remains as to where the debit entry should be shown.
The choices are:
(a)
(b)

to debit the income statement with an expense, or


to debit the balance sheet with an intangible non-current asset.

An intangible non-current asset should only be recorded when the entity is confident that the
expenditure will generate future profit.

IAS 38: Intangible assets

Definitions
3.1

(a)

Research is original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of


gaining new scientific or technical knowledge and understanding.

(b)

Development is the application of research findings or other knowledge to a plan or


design for the production of new or substantially improved materials, devices,
products, processes, systems or services before the start of commercial production or
use.

10.3

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Accounting treatment

4.1
Research

Development

No certainty that the expenditure


will generate future profit

Future profits are expected

Show as an expense in income


statement

MUST capitalise as an intangible noncurrent asset if all of the relevant criteria


are satisfied

Dr Research expense (I/S)


Cr Bank/payables

Dr Intangible non-current assets (B/S)


Cr Bank/payables

P robable future economic benefits


I ntention to complete and use/sell asset
R esources adequate and available to complete
and use/sell asset
A bility to use/sell the asset
T echnical feasibility of completing asset for
use/sale
E xpenditure can be measured reliably

Amortise asset over its useful life once


asset is ready for use

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

Z Co incurred the following costs during the year ended 31 August 20X8.
(1)

$20,000 on salaries for market research staff sent out to canvass drivers' opinions on a
potential new car.

(2)

$100,000 to purchase a machine to manufacture components for the new car. It has an
estimated useful life of 10 years.

(3)

$25,000 on materials to manufacture a prototype and $50,000 on salaries relating to its


design and manufacture. The new car is expected to go on sale in 20X9.

Required
How should each of the above items be shown in the financial statements for the year ended
31 August 20X8?

10.4

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Solution

Amortisation of capitalised development expenditure

5.1

A tangible non-current asset, such as a machine, is capitalised and then depreciated over its
useful life. This is to allocate its costs over the accounting periods which benefit from its use.

5.2

In the same way development expenditure which is incurred now will generate revenue and
profits in the future.
The cost of the development expenditure should be matched against the revenue it
produces. This is called amortisation.

5.3

The 'depreciable amount' (cost less residual value) should be amortised over the useful life
in the same way that revenues are expected to be generated.

5.4

Amortisation should begin when the asset is ready for use.

10.5

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS


5.5

It is an expense in the income statement and is accounted for using the following entry:
Dr
Cr

Amortisation expense (I/S)


Accumulated amortisation (B/S)

Lecture example 2

Technique demonstration

Development Co incurs the following expenditure in years 20X1 20X5.


Research
$
35,000

38,000

20X1
20X2
20X3
20X4
20X5

Development
$
55,000
65,000

The development expenditure meets the IAS 38 criteria that require capitalisation ('PIRATE'). The
item developed in 20X1 and 20X2 goes on sale on 1.1.X3 and it will be three years from then until
any competitor is expected to have a similar product on the market.
Required
Show income statement and balance sheet extracts for the years 20X1 20X5 inclusive.

Solution
X1
$

Income statement extracts


X2
X3
X4
$
$
$

X5
$

X1
$

Balance sheet extracts


X2
X3
X4
$
$
$

X5
$

Expenses
Research expenditure
Amortisation of development expenditure

Non-current assets
Development expenditure
Amortisation
Net book value

10.6

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Summary of Chapter 10

6.1

Research relates to costs incurred to obtain knowledge or understanding. There is no


certainty of future profit from this expenditure and so it should be shown as an expense in
the income statement.

6.2

Development expenditure should be capitalised as an intangible non-current asset


provided all of the PIRATE criteria are met. This asset will then be amortised over the
period during which it is expected to generate income.

Quick Quiz

10.7

10: INTANGIBLE NON-CURRENT ASSETS

10.8

Chapter 10: Question

10.9

10: QUESTION

10.1

Which of the following statements about research and development are true?
(1)

Development expenditure shown on the balance sheet should be amortised over the periods
expected to benefit from the product or service.

(2)

Development expenditure must be capitalised if it meets various criteria.

(3)

Research expenditure is always written off.

All of the above

(1) and (2)

(2) and (3)

(1) and (3)

(2 marks)

10.10

Chapter 10: Answer

10.11

10: ANSWER

10.1

END OF CHAPTER

10.12

Accruals and
prepayments

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand how the matching concept applies to accruals and prepayments.

Identify and calculate the adjustments needed for accruals and prepayments in preparing financial statements.

Prepare the journal entries and ledger entries for the creation of an accrual or prepayment.

Understand and identify the impact on profit and net assets of accruals and prepayments.

Exam Context
Accruals and prepayments are key accounting adjustments and you should expect to see them tested in Paper F3. You
may be asked to calculate the balance sheet amount for accruals and prepayments and/or the relevant expense that
would be shown in the income statement. Alternatively, you may be asked to determine the appropriate journal entries to
record accruals and prepayments. The Pilot Paper included questions on the calculation of a year-end prepayment of an
expense and the income to be shown in the income statement where rent is received both in advance and in arrears.

Qualification Context
This area is a basic skill which is not tested in detail in any other paper. The matching concept however is fundamental
to the preparation of financial statements and this is relevant to Paper F7, Financial Reporting.

11.1

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Overview

Accruals and prepayments

Accounting treatment

Year-end adjustments

Reversing out accruals and


prepayments

Accrued income
and deferred income

Accounting treatment

11.2

Balance sheet presentation

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Introduction

1.1

This chapter is designed to enable you to apply accounting concepts and principles in
relation to the calculation of and adjustments for accruals and prepayments.

1.2

IAS 1 requires financial statements to be prepared on an accruals basis. This is so that


transactions and events are recognised when they occur (and not as cash or its equivalent
is received or paid) and they are recorded in the accounting records and reported in the
financial statements of the period to which they relate.
The accruals basis is also an underlying assumption in the IASB's Framework for the
Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements.

Accruals
1.3

Accruals are expenses incurred by the business during the accounting period but not yet
paid for, ie. expenses in arrears.

Example
1.4

Fred prepares accounts to 31 December each year. On 1 January 20X8, he pays a


telephone bill of $60 which relates to the period October-December 20X7.
Although the payment does not go through the cash book until 20X8, this expense must be
included in the accounts for the year ended 31 December 20X7, as it was incurred during
this period.

Prepayments
1.5

Prepayments arise when expenses are paid for before they have been used. ie. expenses in
advance.

Example
1.6

On 20 December 20X7 Fred pays for insurance on his business premises for the 12 months
commencing 1 January 20X8.
Although the payment was made in 20X7, the expense should not appear in the accounts
for 20X7. The accounts for 20X7 will show a prepayment for the full amount of the insurance
cost and the expense will be recorded in 20X8.

11.3

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Accounting treatment

Year-end adjustments
2.1

Adjustments for accruals and prepayments tend to occur at the end of the year and are
made by way of a journal entry. The required entries are:
Accruals
Dr Expense (I/S)
Cr Accruals (B/S)
Prepayments
Dr Prepayments (B/S)
Cr Expense (I/S)

Balance sheet presentation


2.2

Accruals:
Sub-heading under 'current liabilities'
Prepayments:
Sub-heading under 'current asset'.

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

Fiona set up a business on 1 January 20X7. Her cash payments for the year to 31 December 20X7
included:
Date paid

Amount
$

Period

Electricity
10.3.X7

96

2 months to 28 February 20X7

12.6.X7

120

quarter to 31 May 20X7

14.9.X7

104

quarter to 31 August 20X7

10.12.X7

145

quarter to 30 November 20X7

1.2.X7

375

3 months to 31 March 20X7

6.4.X7

1,584

Rent
12 months to 31 March 20X8

Note: On 6 March 20X8 Fiona received an electricity bill for $168 for the quarter to 28 February
20X8.

11.4

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS


Required
(a)

Calculate the expense incurred by Fiona for electricity and rent for the year ended
31 December 20X7.

(b)

Calculate the amount of any accruals/prepayments at the end of the year.

(c)

State the journal entry required for the year-end adjustments.

Solution

11.5

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

Required
Using the figures from Lecture example 1:
Complete the necessary entries in Fionas ledger accounts as at 31 December 20X7, then balance
off the accounts.

Solution

10.3.X7
12.6.X7
14.9.X7
10.12.X7

1.2.X7
6.4.X7

Cash
Cash
Cash
Cash

Electricity expense (I/S)


$
96
120
104
145

Cash
Cash

Rent expense (I/S)


$
375
1,584

Accruals (B/S)
$

Prepayments (B/S)
$

Section 1.9

11.6

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Reversing out accruals and prepayments

Problem
3.1

Using the figures from Lecture example 1, what is Fionas rent expense for the year to 31
December 20X8 assuming that on 10 April 20X8 she paid rent of $1,740 for the 12 months
commencing 1 April 20X8?

3.2

1.1.X8

1.4.X8

31.12.X8

Expense = ( 3 12 $1,584) + ( 9 12 $1,740) = $1,701

Double entry
3.3
10.4.X8

Rent expense
$
1,740
31.12.X8

Cash

Prepayments
$
396
435

1.1.X8
Balance b/d
31.12.X8 Rent

$
Prepayments
( 3 12 1,740 )

435

This does not produce a sensible answer! The rent expense in the ledger account would
result in a charge to the income statement of $1,305 (not $1,701) and the balance on the
prepayment account would be overstated by $396.

11.7

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Solution
3.4

The opening prepayment must therefore be reversed, ie:


Debit
Credit

Rent expense (I/S)


Prepayments (B/S)

$396
$396

Post this to the ledger accounts in 3.3 and balance off the expense should now be correct!

Summary
3.5

Accruals and prepayments brought forward at the start of the year must be reversed.
Reversal of accrual
Dr Accruals (B/S)
Cr Expense (I/S)
Prepayments
Dr Expense (I/S)
Cr Prepayments (B/S)

Approach to questions
3.6

There are four steps to follow:


(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Reverse opening accrual/prepayment.


Post cash paid during the year.
Post closing accrual/prepayment.
Balance off the accounts.

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

In 20X8 Fiona paid the following electricity bills:


Date paid

Amount
$

Period

12.3.X8

168

quarter to 28 February 20X8

9.6.X8

134

quarter to 31 May 20X8

12.9.X8

118

quarter to 31 August 20X8

12.12.X8

158

quarter to 30 November 20X8

During March 20X9 Fiona received an electricity bill for $189 for the quarter to 28 February 20X9.
Required
Calculate the electricity expense and accrual for the year ended 31 December 20X8 and complete
the ledger accounts.

11.8

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Solution
Electricity expense (I/S)
$

Accruals (B/S)
$

Lecture example 4

Exam standard question for 2 marks

Jimmy Co prepares its financial statements for the year to 30 June each year. The company pays
for its insurance quarterly in advance on 1 March, 1 June, 1 September and 1 December each
year. The annual insurance premium was $24,000 until 31 August 20X6, after that date it
increased to $30,000 per year.
Required
What insurance expense and end of year prepayment should be included in the financial
statements for the year ended 30 June 20X7?
A
B
C
D

Expense
$29,000
$29,000
$28,500
$28,500

Prepayment
$2,500
$5,000
$2,500
$5,000

11.9

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Solution

Quick Quiz Q2-5

Summary of Chapter 11

4.1

Accruals and prepayments are an example of the accruals basis which is an underlying
assumption from the IASB Framework.

4.2

Accruals are made when expenses are paid in arrears, whereas prepayments arise when
expenses are paid for in advance.

4.3

Reverse accruals and prepayments at the beginning of the next accounting period so that
the current year expense is correct.

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 11

5.1

Accruals adjustment:
Dr
Cr

5.2

Expense (I/S)
Accruals (B/S)

Prepayments adjustment:
Dr
Cr

Prepayments (B/S)
Expense (I/S)

11.10

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS


5.3

Approach to questions (four steps):


(1)

Reverse opening accrual/ prepayment:


Accruals:
Dr
Accruals (B/S)
Cr
Expense (I/S)
Prepayments:
Dr
Expense (I/S)
Cr
Prepayments (B/S)

(2)

Post cash paid during the year.

(3)

Post closing accrual/ prepayment.

(4)

Balance off the ledger accounts.

11.11

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

11.12

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Additional Notes

11.13

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Accrued income and deferred income

6.1

Accruals and prepayments relate to when expenses are paid in arrears or advance. Income
may also be received in arrears or advance.

Accrued income
6.2

This relates to when income has been earned during the accounting period but not invoiced
or received.

Illustration
6.3

Jenny owns a property which she rents out for $3,000 per quarter. The property was
occupied all year; however Jenny only received $9,000 in rent because she forgot to send
out the final invoice of the year.
As the property was let for 12 months, Jenny's income statement should show income of
$12,000 (4 $3,000) as this is what she has earned.
She will therefore need to accrue the 'missing' income of $3,000 as a year end journal and
also show a receivable for "rent in arrears".
The adjustment is:
Dr
Cr

$
3,000

Rent in arrears (B/S)


Rental income (I/S)

$
3,000

The rent in arrears is shown in the balance sheet within current assets.

Deferred income
6.4

This relates to when income is received in advance of it being earned.

Illustration
6.5

Ben has a year end of December and rents out his property for $1,000 per month. His
tenant pays on time each month and during December 20X7 paid Ben $2,000 as he would
be away when the January 20X8 payment was due.
Ben has received income of $13,000 but only $12,000 of this relates to the current year. He
must therefore remove $1,000 of income from this years accounts because it relates to next
year. A liability will also be shown for "rent in advance".
The adjustment is:
Dr
Cr

$
1,000

Rental income (I/S)


Rent in advance (B/S)

$
1,000

The rent in advance is shown in the balance sheet within current liabilities.

11.14

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

Approach to questions
6.6

The approach for accrued income and deferred income is exactly the same as for accruals
and prepayments.
There are four steps to follow:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Reverse opening rent in arrears/advance.


Post cash received during the year.
Post closing rent in arrears/advance.
Balance off the accounts.

11.15

11: ACCRUALS AND PREPAYMENTS

11.16

Chapter 11: Questions

11.17

11: QUESTIONS

Data for Questions 11.1 11.3


A company made the following payments in 20X5 in respect of rent and telephone expenses:
Rent

Date paid

Quarter ended 31 January 20X5


Quarter ended 30 April 20X5
Quarter ended 31 July 20X5
Quarter ended 31 October 20X5
Quarter ended 31 January 20X6

02.01.20X5
02.01.20X5
31.04.20X5
30.07.20X5
01.11.20X5

Amount
$
300
300
450
450
450

Telephone
Quarter ended 31 January 20X5
Quarter ended 30 April 20X5
Quarter ended 31 July 20X5
Quarter ended 31 October 20X5

02.03.20X5
05.06.20X5
02.09.20X5
10.12.20X5

270
310
320
330

A telephone bill for $345 in respect of the quarter ended 31 January 20X6 was received by the company in
February 20X6. The company's year end is December.
11.1

11.2

11.3

11.4

What balance should have been brought forward on the accruals account in relation to rent payable at
1 January 20X5?
A

$100 credit

$200 credit

$100 debit

$200 debit

(2 marks)

What will be the income statement charge for telephone expenses for the year ended 31 December
20X5?
A

$1,165

$1,180

$1,255

$1,280

(2 marks)

At 31 December 20X5 what balance will be included as a prepayment or accrual in respect of rent?
A

$300 prepayment

$200 accrual

$150 prepayment

$150 accrual

(2 marks)

At 31 December 20X8 Blue Anchor Co has an insurance prepayment of $250. During the year they pay
$800 in respect of various insurance contracts. The closing accrual for insurance is $90.
What is the income statement charge for insurance for year ended 31 December 20X9? $
(2 marks)

11.18

11: QUESTIONS

11.5

11.6

Max has paid his rent for the period 1 April 20X0 to 30 June 20X1 of $4,800. His first set of accounts is
drawn up for the period from 1 April 20X0 to 28 February 20X1. His accounts should reflect
A

Rent expense of $4,800 only

Rent expense of $3,520, a prepayment of $1,280

Rent expense of $3,600, a prepayment of $1,200

Rent expense of $3,840, a prepayment of $960

Constains Co has an insurance prepayment of $320 at 31 March 20X2. During the year ended 31 March
20X2 Constains paid two insurance bills, one for $1,300 and one for $520. The charge for the year in the
accounts for insurance was $1,760.
What was the prepayment at 31 March 20X1? $

11.7

11.8

(2 marks)

(2 marks)

An electricity prepayment for $300 was treated as an accrual in a sole traders income statement. As a
result the profit was
A

Overstated by $600

Understated by $300

Understated by $600

(1 mark)

A. Cruel
A. Cruel prepares his financial statements for the year to 31 December each year. He pays rent on his
premises quarterly in advance on 1 February, 1 May, 1 August and 1 November. The annual rent was
$12,000 until 30 September 20X7 and $15,000 per year thereafter.
(i)

What rent expense and prepayment should be included in the financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20X7?
A
B
C
D

(ii)

Prepayment

$12,750
$12,750
$15,000
$15,000

$1,250
$2,500
$2,250
$1,250

The following year the reversal of the prepayment will result in which of the following in the rent
expense account?
A
B
C
D

(iii)

Expense

Credit balance of $1,250


Debit balance of $1,250
Credit balance of $2,500
Debit balance of $2,250

A. Cruel has just looked at the accounts you have prepared and is confused as he knows he has
paid more rent than is showing in the income statement.
Which accounting concept means that the income statement may not just show the cash paid?
A
B
C

Going concern
Accruals
Business entity

11.19

11: QUESTIONS

11.9

Fairlop
The accounts of Fairlop are made up to 31 December every year. When preparing the accounts for 20X7
you extract the following information from the payments side of the cash book:
$
20X6
1 October
Rent (to 31.3.X7)
500
20X7
10 January
1 April
10 April
10 July
1 October
10 October

Electricity
Rent
Electricity
Electricity
Rent
Electricity

300
550
300
250
550
250

20X8
10 January

Electricity

350

You ascertain that rent is paid half-yearly in advance and that electricity bills relate to the quarter ended in
the month before payment.
Required
Calculate the following amounts:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

The rent expense for the year ended 31 December 20X7


The electricity expense for the year ended 31 December 20X7
The balance on the prepayment account at 31 December 20X7
The balance on the accruals account at 31 December 20X7

11.20

Chapter 11: Answers

11.21

11: ANSWERS

11.1

11.2

300 = 200

$
(180)
1,230
230
1,280

Reverse accrual at 1.1.X5


Paid (270 + 310 + 320 + 330)
Accrual at 31.12.X5 ( 2 3 x 345)
I/S charge
11.3

11.4

$1,140

450 = 150

$250 + $800 + $90 = $1,140


11.5

11.6

$260

Rent for the 15-month period


Prepayment 4 15 $4,800

$4,800
$1,280

Insurance Expense
Prepayment reversal ()
Cash
Cash

$
260
1,300
520

$
I/S
Prepayment

2,080
11.7

11.8

A. Cruel
(i)

1,760
320
2,080

The prepayment would have decreased the electricity expense by $300 and increased profits.
Treating the prepayment as an accrual would have increased the electricity expense and
decreased profit. Profit is therefore understated by 2 $300 = $600.
A
Rent expense:
January September 20X7 ($12,000 9/12)
October December 20X7 ($15,000 3/12)

$
9,000
3,750
12,750

Prepayment:
1 November payment of $3,750 ($15,000 ) relates to November, December and January.
prepay January 20X8 expense: $3,750 1/3 = $1,250.
(ii)

(iii)

11.22

11: ANSWERS

11.9

Fairlop
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Rent expense:
Electricity expense:
Prepayments:
Accruals:

$1,075
$1,150
$275
$350

Workings
Prepayments (B/S)
1.1.X7
31.12.X7

Balance b/d (500 3/6)


Rent (550 3/6)

$
250
275
525

1.1.X8

Balance b/d

275

Rent
Balance c/d

$
250
275
525

1.1.X7
31.12.X7

Balance b/d
Electricity

$
300
350
650

1.1.X8

Balance b/d

350

1.1.X7
31.12.X7

Accruals (B/S)
1.1.X7
31.12.X7

Electricity
Balance c/d

$
300
350
650

Rent (I/S)
1.1.X7
1.4.X7
1.10.X7

Prepayments
Bank
Bank

$
250
550
550

$
31.12.X7
31.12.X7

Income statement
Prepayments

1,350

1,075
275
1,350

Electricity (I/S)
$
10.1.X7
10.4.X7
10.7.X7
10.10.X7
31.12.X7

Bank
Bank
Bank
Bank
Accruals

300
300
250
250
350
1,450

11.23

1.1.X7

Accruals

31.12.X7

Income statement

$
300

1,150
1,450

11: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

11.24

Irrecoverable debts
and allowances

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Explain and identify examples of receivables and payables.

Identify the benefits and costs of offering credit facilities to customers.

Understand the purpose of credit limits and an aged receivables analysis.

Prepare the bookkeeping entries to write off a bad debt, record a bad debt recovered and create and adjust an
allowance for receivables.

Identify the impact of bad debts on the income statement and on the balance sheet.

Illustrate how to include movements in the allowance for receivables in the income statement and how the
closing balance of the allowance should appear in the balance sheet.

Account for contras between trade receivables and payables.

Prepare, reconcile and understand the purpose of supplier statements.

Classify items as current or non-current liabilities in the balance sheet.

Exam Context
Questions on this topic are likely to require you to perform basic calculations dealing with writing off debts, adjusting for
cash subsequently received and adjusting the allowance for receivables. You will also need to be able to determine the
balances to be shown in the income statement and balance sheet.

Qualification Context
This area is a basic skill and detailed calculations are not tested in any other paper.

12.1

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Overview
Amounts recovered

Bad debts

Irrecoverable debts
and allowances

Doubtful debts

Allowances

Specific

General

12.2

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Introduction

1.1

This chapter is designed to enable you to calculate and make adjustment for bad debts, and
allowances for receivables.

1.2

A trade receivable should only be classed as an asset if it is probable that it is recoverable


(ie that the customer will pay the amounts due).

Bad debts

2.1

If a debt is definitely irrecoverable it should be written off to the income statement as a


bad debt. This is an example of prudence.

Accounting treatment
2.2

Dr
Cr

Bad debt expense (I/S)


Trade receivables (B/S)

You may see the debit entry being made to an 'irrecoverable debts expense' account. This
is effectively the same thing.

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

Fight & Co has trade receivables at 31 December 20X7 of $65,000. A review of customer files
indicates that two customers, Ali and Tyson, which owe $7,000 and $8,000 respectively, have
gone bankrupt and their debts are considered irrecoverable.
Required
(a)
(b)

Calculate the balance c/d on the trade receivables account at the end of the year.
Calculate the bad debt expense shown in the income statement.

Solution

31.12.X7 Bal b/d

Trade receivables (B/S)


$
65,000

Bad debt expense (I/S)


$

12.3

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Doubtful debts

3.1

If a debt is possibly irrecoverable an allowance for the potential irrecoverability of that debt
should be made. A new account is created, Allowance for receivables, this account is offset
against the trade receivables balance on the balance sheet and the expense taken to the
income statement.

Accounting treatment
3.2

Dr
Cr

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)


Allowance for receivables (B/S)

Again, an 'irrecoverable debts expense' account can also be used.

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

A further review of Fight & Co's customer files indicates there is some uncertainty as to whether a
debt of $3,500 owed by Bugner is recoverable.
(a)

Calculate the allowance for receivables shown on the balance sheet.

(b)

Calculate the doubtful debts expense shown in the income statement.

(c)

Show how the information from Lecture examples 1 and 2 would be shown in extracts from
the income statement and balance sheet.

Solution
Allowance for receivables (B/S)

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)

12.4

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Types of allowance
3.3

(a)
(b)

Specific:
General:

provided against a particular/named individual customer.


percentage applied to total trade receivables after:

(i)

writing off bad debts;

(ii)

deducting full balance of any customers for which specific allowance has been
created.

Order of calculation
3.4

(a)

Write up trade receivables account for credit sales and cash received in period.

(b)

Write off bad debts


Dr
Cr

(c)

Make any entries for specific allowances:


Dr
Cr

(d)

Bad debt expense (I/S)


Trade receivables (B/S)
Doubtful debts expense (I/S)
Allowance for receivables (B/S)

In workings, calculate the general allowance on trade receivables (after bad debts
written off and excluding full amounts for which specific allowance has been made).

(e)

$
100
(20)
80

Total trade receivables


Less: specific allowances
General allowance @ 5% =
total allowance:
Specific
General

4
20
4
24

12.5

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

A businesss trade receivables account showed a year end balance of $47,440. It was decided that
amounts totalling $340 should be written off as irrecoverable, a specific allowance was to be made
against an amount of $400 due from Dodgy Co, a customer, and a general allowance of 2% was to
be made against remaining debts.
Required
(a)
(b)

Calculate the allowance for receivables shown in the balance sheet.


Calculate the bad and doubtful debts expense shown in the income statement.

Solution

Balance b/d

Trade receivables (B/S)


$
47,440

Allowances for receivables (B/S)


$

Bad and doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$

General allowance
$
Trade receivables (net of bad debts written off)
Less: specific allowance
General allowance @ 2%

12.6

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Effect in subsequent periods

Bad debts written off last year, customer pays this year
4.1

If a bad debt is recovered having previously been written off, it is credited to the bad debt
expense account, i.e. the accounting treatment from the original write-off is reversed.
Accounting treatment
(1)

Cash received
Dr
Cr

Cash
Trade receivables

Reverse original
write off
Dr
Cr

Trade receivables
Bad debt expense

OR
(2)

Short method
Dr
Cr

Cash
Bad debt expense

Lecture example 4

Preparation question

Fight & Co (see Lecture example 1) subsequently receive a cheque of $7,000 from Ali.
Required
Show the treatment of this recovery in the relevant T accounts.

Solution
Trade receivables (B/S)
1.1.X8 Bal b/d

$
50,000

12.7

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES


Bad debt expense (I/S)
$

Cash (B/S)
$

Doubtful debts specific allowance last year, customer pays outstanding


amounts this year
4.2

A credit entry for the cash is made to the trade receivables account because the debt is still
included in the total trade receivables figure.
The allowance is then reversed as it is no longer needed.
Accounting treatment
(a)

Record the cash received


Dr
Cr

Cash (B/S)
Trade receivables (B/S)

then:
(b)

Remove allowance
Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


Doubtful debts expense (I/S)

12.8

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Lecture example 5

Preparation question

Required
Show the accounting treatment for Fight & Co if, having made a specific allowance (see Lecture
example 2), during the next year Bugner repays his debt of $3,500 to Fight & Co in cash?

Solution
Trade receivables (B/S)
1.1.X8 Bal b/d

$
50,000

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


$
1.1.X8 Bal b/d

$
3,500

Bad and doubtful debt expense (I/S)


$

Doubtful debts specific allowance last year, goes bad this year
4.3

The debt is no longer doubtful, but definitely bad. It should therefore be removed from the
trade receivables and the allowance for receivables accounts.
Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


Trade receivables (B/S)
12.9

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Lecture example 6

Preparation question

Required
Following on from the information used in Lecture example 2, suppose that in the next accounting
period, the debt from Bugner is considered to have gone bad.
What double entry would be required to record this?

Solution

Doubtful debts - general allowance


4.4

Allowance is usually changed at the end of each period to reflect the change in value of total
trade receivables.

Accounting treatment
4.5
(1)

Remove opening allowance

Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables


Doubtful debts expense
Replace with closing allowance

Dr
Cr

Doubtful debts expense


Allowance for receivables

12.10

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES


OR
(2) Short method:
Increase/decrease opening allowance to arrive at required closing allowance
Increase:
Dr
Cr

Doubtful debts expense


Allowance for receivables

Decrease:
Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables


Doubtful debts expense

Lecture example 7

Preparation question

The following information is available for A Co.


Year ended 31 December 20X7: Trade receivables $20,000
Year ended 31 December 20X8: Trade receivables $30,000
A Co requires a general allowance of 5% of trade receivables in each year.
Required
Show the required adjustment to the allowance for receivables account in the year ended 31
December 20X8 using both methods described in section 4.5

Solution
Long method: 4.5 (1)
Allowance for receivables
$

Doubtful debts expense


$

12.11

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES


Short method: 4.5 (2)
Allowance for receivables
$

Doubtful debts expense


$

Lecture example 8

Exam standard for 2 marks

At 30 September 20X7 G Co had an allowance for receivables of $24,000.


During the year ended 30 September 20X8 G Co recovered $2,000 from a customer whose
balance was written off in 20X7 and wrote off further debts totalling $18,000. The closing
allowance for receivables is required to be $21,000. No adjustments have been made for this
information.
Required
What amount should appear in the income statement for the year ended 30 September 20X8 for
the above items?
A
B
C
D

$13,000
$15,000
$17,000
$23,000

12.12

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Solution

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 12

5.1

A trade receivable is an asset of the business which should only be shown in the financial
statements if it is believed to be recoverable.

5.2

Bad or irrecoverable debts must therefore be written off as an expense in the income
statement.

5.3

An allowance should be made against trade receivables where there is concern as to


whether or not a balance will be recoverable. There are two types of allowance: specific
and general.

5.4

Specific allowances relate to particular customer balances whereas a general allowance is


usually a percentage of remaining debts.

12.13

12: IRRECOVERABLE DEBTS AND ALLOWANCES

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 12

6.1

Bad (irrecoverable) debt adjustment:


Dr
Cr

6.2

Doubtful debt adjustment:


Dr
Cr

6.3

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)


Allowance for receivables (B/S)

Recording of cash received from a customer whose balance was previously written off:
Dr
Cr

6.4

Bad debt expense (I/S)


Trade receivables (B/S)

Cash (B/S)
Bad debt expense (I/S)

Recording of cash received from a customer against which a specific allowance was
previously made:
Record cash received:
Dr
Cash (B/S)
Cr
Trade receivables (B/S)
Remove the allowance:
Dr
Allowance for receivables (B/S)
Cr
Doubtful debts expense (I/S)

6.5

Writing a balance off as irrecoverable where a specific allowance was previously made:
Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


Trade receivables (B/S)

12.14

Chapter 12: Questions

12.15

12: QUESTIONS

12.1

12.2

12.3

A company receives news that a major customer has been declared bankrupt. The entries now required
are:
A

Debit bad debt expense, Credit trade receivables

Debit sales, Credit trade receivables

(1 mark)

At 1 January 20X9 Farriers has an allowance for receivables of $2,000 consisting of a specific allowance
for $700 in respect of Black Lion Co and a $1,300 general allowance. During the year Black Lion goes
into liquidation and the debt is written off. No other debts go bad and at 31 January 20X9 the balance on
the trade receivables is $50,950. Farriers wishes to provide for a debt of $950 from Verulam and to have
a general allowance of 2% of good trade receivables. The bad and doubtful debts charged to the
income statement for 20X9 is:
A

$900

$924

$1,600

$2,200

(2 marks)

The preliminary trial balance of Jessie and Co as at 30 September 20X7 included:


Debit
$
90,350

Trade receivables
Allowance for receivables (brought forward as at 1 October 20X6)
Bad and doubtful debt expense

1,985

Credit
$
2,490

Further adjustments are to be made as follows:


(i)

No entries have been made in respect of cash of $1,320 received from Dome Co whose balance
had been written off last year, and

(ii)

At 30 September 20X7 an allowance is required against a balance of $1,950 due from Jed Co as
well as a general allowance of 1.5% of remaining debts.

What is the bad and doubtful debt expense in the income statement?
12.4

(2 marks)

Gillian
On 31 December 20X4, Gillians nominal ledger included a trade receivables balance of $47,900 along
with an allowance for receivables (brought forward as at 1 January 20X4) of $2,551. Of this $537 relates
to a specific customer, the remainder being a general allowance. After a review of trade receivables at the
year end, the following adjustments are to be made:
(1)

Debts totalling $1,615 are to be written off as irrecoverable.

(2)

No entry has yet been made in the books for $418 cash received on 31 December 20X4 from
David, a customer whose debt was written off during 20X3.

(3)

Cash posted to the trade receivables account during the year include $537 from Jim. The amount
due from Jim had been specifically provided against at 31 December 20X3.

(4)

Specific allowance is to be made against debts totalling $835 together with a general allowance of
2%.
Required
(a)
(b)

Write up the relevant ledger accounts for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
Show the relevant extracts from the financial statements.

12.16

12: QUESTIONS

12.5

Johnson & Co
(1)

Johnson & Co had total receivables owing to them at 31 December 20X7 of $9,650. They
included $700 owed by T Black, who had fled the country six months earlier, and various debts
due from K White, totalling $335 and dating back to the years 20X1-20X5. It was decided that the
above debts should be written off.

(2)

During 20X8 Johnson & Co made sales on credit of $40,385 and received cash from trade
receivables of $32,050. There were no irrecoverable debts. However, there was some doubt as to
whether a debt of $450 owed by J Green would be met and it was decided to make an allowance
against this specific debt and against 2% of the remaining debts.

(3)

During 20X9 credit sales totalled $50,235 and cash of $37,140 was received from trade
receivables. A review of trade receivables at the year end revealed the following:
(i)

The amount owed by J Green was now considered irrecoverable and should be written off;

(ii)

Other irrecoverable debts totalling $545 were to be written off;

(iii)

Allowance was to be made against an amount of $250 owed by P Brown;

(iv)

The general allowance was to be maintained at 2% of good debts.

Required
Produce ledger accounts to record the above transactions for the years ended 31 December 20X7, 20X8
and 20X9.

12.17

12: QUESTIONS

12.18

Chapter 12: Answers

12.19

12: ANSWERS

12.1

12.2

A
Trade receivables balance
Less specific allowance

$
50,950
(950)
50,000

General allowance = 2% $50,000 =

$1,250

Movement in general allowance is a reduction of $50 ($1,300 $1,250)


Charge to I/S
Specific allowance Verulam
Less: decrease in general allowance
12.3

$
950
(50)
900

$1,451
Bad and doubtful debts expense per trial balance
Less: bad debt recovered
Add: increase in allowance (W)

Allowance c/d

specific
general 1.5% (90,350 1,950)

Less allowance b/d


increase
12.4

$
1,985
(1,320)
786
1,451
$
1,950
1,326
3,276
2,490
786

Gillian
(a)

31.12.X4

Balance b/d

Trade receivables (B/S)


$
47,900
31.12.X4 Bad debts
31.12.X4 Balance c/d
47,900

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


$
807
1.1.X4
Balance b/d
Irrecoverable & doubtful debts ()
31.12.X4
Balance c/d (W1)
1,744
2,551

Trade receivables

Irrecoverable and doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$
1,615
Bank (bad debt recovered)
Allowance for receivables
Income statement
1,615

12.20

$
1,615
46,285
47,900

$
2,551
2,551

$
418
807
390
1,615

12: ANSWERS

Working

Receivables
$
46,285
(835)
45,450

Trade receivables
Less: specific allowance
General allowance ($45,450 2%)
(b)

Allowance
$
835
909
1,744

Gillian
Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X4 (extract)
CURRENT ASSETS
Trade receivables
Less: allowance for receivables

$
46,285
(1,744)

$
44,541

Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X4 (extract)


$
Less expenses:
Irrecoverable and doubtful debts expense
12.5

390

Johnson & Co

31.12.X7 Balance b/d

Trade receivables (B/S)


$
9,650
31.12.X7 Irrecoverable
debts expense
(700 + 335)
31.12.X7 Balance c/d
9,650

$
1,035
8,615
9,650

1.1.X8

Balance b/d
Sales

8,615
40,385
49,000

Bank
31.12.X8 Balance c/d

32,050
16,950
49,000

1.1.X9

Balance b/d
Sales

16,950
50,235

Bank
31.12.X9 Irrecoverable
debts expense
(450 + 545)
31.12.X9 Balance c/d

37,140
995

67,185
1.1.YO

Balance b/d

29,050
67,185

29,050

Irrecoverable (bad) & doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$
31.12.X7 Trade receivables
1,035
31.12.X7 Income statement
31.12.X8 Allowance for
receivables (W1)

780

31.12.X9 Trade receivables


31.12.X9 Allowances for
receivables

995
46
1,041

12.21

$
1,035

31.12.X8 Income statement

780

31.12.X9 Income statement

1,041
1,041

12: ANSWERS

31.12.X8 Balance b/d

31.12.X9 Balance c/d (W2)

Allowance for receivables (B/S)


$
780
31.12.X8 Irrecoverable and
doubtful debts
expense
1.1.X9
Balance b/d
31.12.X9 Irrecoverable and
doubtful debts
expense ()
826
826

$
780
780
46

826

Workings
(W1) Allowance for receivables as at 31 December 20X8.
Trade receivables
Less: specific allowance (J Green)
General allowance ($16,500 2%)

Receivables
$
16,950
(450)
16,500

Allowance
$

Receivables
$
29,050
(250)
28,800

Allowance
$

450
330
780

(W2) Allowance for receivables as at 31 December 20X9.

Trade receivables
Less: specific allowance (P Brown)
General allowance required ($28,800 2%)

END OF CHAPTER

12.22

250
576
826

Provisions
and contingencies

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the definition of 'provision', 'contingent liability' and 'contingent asset', distinguish between them and
classify items accordingly.

Identify and illustrate the different methods of accounting for provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent
assets.

Calculate provisions and changes in provisions and account for the movement in provisions.

Report provisions in the final accounts.

Exam Context
Questions on this area are likely to focus on identifying when a provision or contingent liability should be made/disclosed
in the financial statements. You may also be required to calculate a provision. The Pilot Paper included a question on
how a remote contingent liability should be accounted for.

Qualification Context
Your understanding of IAS 37 will be developed at the Fundamentals level paper Financial Reporting (F7) where you are
likely to have to consider whether the provision criteria are satisfied based on more subjective scenarios.

13.1

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES

Overview
Accounting treatment

Recognition criteria

Provisions

Provisions and
contingencies

Contingent liabilities

Contingent assets

13.2

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES

IAS 37: Provisions, contingent liabilities and


contingent assets

1.1

Introduction
Before the introduction of IAS 37, there was little guidance on when a provision must and
must not be made.
This caused problems as entities tended to choose to make and then release provisions in
order to smooth out profits, rather than making a provision where they had an obligation to
incur expenditure.
IAS 37 aims to prevent this happening in the future.

Provisions

2.1

Definition
A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.

2.2

Recognition
A provision should only be recognised (ie. included in the financial statements) when:
(a)

An entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event;

(b)

It is probable that an outflow of economic resources will be required to settle the


obligation; and

(c)

A reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

Unless all three conditions are met, no provision can be recognised.


2.3

Legal obligation
A legal obligation usually arises out of a contract.
Illustration
Grass Co sells lawnmowers and offers a one-year warranty on all models.
Once Grass Co sells a lawnmower (the past event) it has a legal obligation to repair any
defects according to the warranty agreement.
It should therefore make an estimate of the probable costs of repair and make a provision
for this amount in its financial statements.

2.4

Constructive obligation
A constructive obligation arises through past behaviour and actions where the entity has
raised a valid expectation that it will carry out a particular action.
Illustration
Seed Co also sells lawnmowers. It does not offer a warranty on its products, however it has
a reputation for making free reasonable repairs to lawnmowers bought from the business.
Customers buying from Seed Co all expect to receive this benefit.
13.3

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES


Here no warranty is offered and so Seed Co does not have a legal obligation. Its past
actions however have created a constructive obligation. It should also therefore make a
provision for the probable costs of repairs.
2.5

Accounting treatment
The provision represents both a cost to the business and a potential liability:
Dr
Cr

Expense (I/S)
Provision (B/S)

The required provision will be reviewed at each year end and increased or decreased as
necessary.
To increase a provision:
Dr
Cr

Expense (I/S)
Provision (B/S)

To decrease a provision:
Dr
Cr

Provision (B/S)
Expense (I/S)

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

Grass Co is reviewing its warranty obligations. Based on sales during 20X7 it has established that
if all lawnmowers sold required minor repairs this would cost $1m whereas if major repairs were
required this would cost $6m.
Grass Co expects that 75% of lawnmowers will have no faults, 20% will need minor repairs and
5% major repairs.
Required
(a)
(b)
(c)

What provision should be made in 20X7 and what accounting entry is needed to record it?
What entry should be made in 20X8 assuming the provision required then is $0.75m?
What entry should be made in 20X9 assuming the provision required then is $0.3m?

Solution

13.4

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES

Contingent liabilities

3.1

A contingent liability is an uncertain liability that does not meet the three criteria for
recognising a provision.
IAS 37 defines a contingent liability as the following:
(a)

A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be
confirmed only the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future
event not wholly within the control of the entity; or

(b)

A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
(i)

it is not probable that an outflow of economic resources will be required to


settle the obligation; or

(ii)

the amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.

Contingent liabilities should be disclosed in the notes unless probability of an outflow of


resources embodying economic benefits is remote.

Illustrative example
3.2

Company A has entered into an agreement to act as guarantor on a bank loan taken out by
Mr Smith. Mr Smith is a financially secure individual, and the directors are of the opinion that
the chances of him defaulting on the loan are slim.
How should company A account for this guarantee?

Solution
3.3

Company A has a present obligation (it is legally obliged to honour the guarantee).
However, as the likelihood of Company A having to pay out under the guarantee is not
probable then no provision for the liability should be made. Instead, the guarantee should be
disclosed in the notes as a contingent liability (unless considered remote, in which case it
should be ignored altogether).

13.5

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES


3.4

Decision Tree

Contingent assets

4.1

A possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only by
the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within
the control of the entity.
Contingent assets should be disclosed in the notes where an inflow of economic benefits is
probable, otherwise they should be ignored.
If the probability of an inflow of economic benefits is virtually certain then the asset is not a
contingent asset and should be recognised in the financial statements.

13.6

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 13

5.1

A provision should only be made in the financial statements when an entity has a present
obligation to incur expenditure. It must also be more likely than not that the expenditure
will be incurred and a reliable estimate of the amount is known.

5.2

A contingent liability should be disclosed where the criteria for making a provision are not
met, but where there is either a possible obligation or a present obligation but it is only
possible that the expenditure will be incurred.

5.3

Contingent assets should only be included in the financial statements if it is certain to be


received and should be disclosed if probable.

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 13

6.1

Adjustment to create or increase a provision:


Dr
Cr

6.2

Expense (I/S)
Provision (B/S)

Adjustment to decrease a provision:


Dr
Cr

Provision (B/S)
Expense (I/S)

13.7

13: PROVISIONS AND CONTINGENCIES

13.8

Chapter 13: Questions

13.9

13: QUESTIONS

13.1

H Co is currently in the middle of a protracted lawsuit which it is vigorously defending. The directors are
reasonably confident that the action will not be successful but are aware that the opposite outcome is a
possibility. It is difficult to quantify any potential damages, but the directors feel they are unlikely to
exceed $50,000.
How should the above item be treated in the financial statements?

13.2

Provision

Contingent liability

Contingent asset

(1 mark)

How should a contingent liability and a probable contingent asset be accounted for?
A

Probable contingent assets and contingent liabilities should be disclosed in the financial
statements.

Probable contingent assets must always be accrued and contingent liabilities must always be
disclosed in the financial statements.

Contingent liabilities must always be either accrued or disclosed and probable contingent assets
must always be disclosed in the financial statements.

Contingent liabilities must always be provided for and probable contingent assets must be
disclosed in the financial statements.
(2 marks)

13.10

Chapter 13: Answers

13.11

13: ANSWERS

13.1

13.2

END OF CHAPTER

13.12

Control accounts

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the purpose of control accounts for accounts receivable and accounts payable.

Understand how control accounts relate to the double entry system.

Prepare ledger control accounts from given information.

Perform basic control account reconciliations for accounts receivable and accounts payable and identify errors
which would be highlighted by performing them.

Identify and correct errors in control accounts and ledger accounts.

Account for discounts allowed and discounts received.

Account for contras between trade receivables and trade payables.

Exam Context
Questions on this topic are likely to require you to correct the closing balance on a receivables or payables control
account including items such as contras and discounts. You may also be required to calculate receivables/payables
balances where goods are sold/bought with trade and/or settlement discounts.

Qualification Context
This chapter covers topics which are only examined in Financial Accounting.

14.1

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Overview
Reconciliations

Receivables ledger control account


Payables ledger control account

Receivables ledger
Payables ledger

Control accounts

Contra entries

Returns, credit notes, refunds


and over payments

Trade discounts

Discounts
allowed and received

Settlement discounts

Sales tax considerations

14.2

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Recap

1.1

In Chapters 4 and 5 we saw how a business' transactions were categorised in the books of
prime entry. The totals of these were then posted using double entry to the nominal ledger
to give a summary of the information.

1.2

For example, credit sales:

1.3
The
nominal ledger contains three ledger accounts which are affected when a business sells on
credit:
(a)

Sales

(b)

Bank

(c)

Trade receivables this shows the total amount owed by all customers at a
particular point in time.
it is also called the receivables ledger control account
(RLCA)

1.4

In order to chase overdue debts however a business must know how much each customer
owes at a particular time.
This balance could be determined by going back into the detail of the books of prime entry
and extracting the information for each customer.
This is a very time consuming process and so instead a memorandum ledger is
maintained for each individual customer showing invoices raised, cash received and
therefore the amount owed to the business.
This memorandum ledger is called a receivables ledger.

1.5

The reverse is true when a business buys on credit.

14.3

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Terminology
1.6

In the nominal ledger:

Receivables ledger control account (trade receivables/RLCA):


total owed by all credit customers.

Payables ledger control account (trade payables/PLCA):


total owed to all credit suppliers.

Memorandum ledgers:

Receivables ledger:
balance owed by each individual credit customer

Payables ledger:
balance owed to each individual credit supplier

The flow of information

2.1
Sales
Invoice

Memo
Receivables
Ledger

SDB

Payment
to
suppliers

Receipt
from
customers

Cash book

Purchase
Invoice

PDB

Memo
Payables
Ledger
Supplier X

Customer A
Customer B

Nominal Ledger

PLCA
Trade payables

Customer C

Supplier Y
Supplier Z

Bank (B/S)
Purchases (I/S)

Sales (I/S)

Trial Balance
Financial Statements

14.4

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


2.2

The information in the receivables ledger control account (RLCA) and receivables ledger
(RL) is posted from the same source documents.
Therefore
the balance on the RLCA should equal the sum of all balances from the RL
Similarly
the balance on the PLCA should equal the sum of all balances from the PL

2.3

If the balances do not agree then an error has been made. This will be identified through a
control account reconciliation (Section 5).

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

A Co has the following information:


10 January 20X6
Sells $150 of goods to customer A
Sells $200 of goods to customer B
15 January 20X6
A Co purchases $100 of goods from supplier Y
A Co purchases $1,300 of goods from supplier Z
21 January 20X6
A Co receives full payment from customer B and this money is used to pay supplier Y.
Required
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Record the above transactions in the books of prime entry and the memorandum ledgers.
Post the totals from the BOPE to the nominal ledger.
Balance off nominal ledger accounts.
Reconcile the memorandum ledgers to the control accounts.

Solution
(1)

Books of prime entry


Sales day book
Date

Customer

14.5

Amount

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


Purchase day book
Date

Supplier

Amount

Cash rceipts book


Date

Narrative

Total

Sales

Receivables

Total

Purchases

Payables

Cash payments book


Date

Narrative

Memorandum ledgers
Receivables ledger
Customer A

Customer B

Payables ledger
Supplier Y

Supplier Z

14.6

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


(2) & (3) Nominal ledger
RLCA (B/S)

PLCA (B/S)

Bank (B/S)

Sales (I/S)

Purchases (I/S)

(4)

Reconciliation
Balance per list of balances
$
Receivables ledger
Customer A
Customer B
Balance per RLCA
Balance per list of balances
$
Payables ledger
Supplier Y
Supplier Z
Balance per PLCA

14.7

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Other entries
A business must ensure that any transaction recorded in the receivables ledger control
account or the payables ledger control account is also reflected in the memorandum
ledgers.

Contra entries
3.1

Sometimes a business may have a customer which also supplies the business with goods.
Illustration:
P Co is a printing business which sells stationery to F Co, a florist. F Co supplies P Co with
flowers and plants for its offices.
During October, P Co sells stationery worth $200 to F Co and F Co delivers flowers and
plants to P Co worth $70.
P Co has the following amounts in its books:
Receivables:
Payables:

$200
$70

The two businesses agree to offset the balances receivable and payable via a contra.
The contra will be for the lower of the two amounts: $70. This will decrease both
receivables and payables by $70 and the remaining $130 can then be paid in cash.
3.2

A contra entry is always recorded as:


Dr
Cr

PLCA
RLCA

This will reduce both receivables and payables.


3.3

Note that the memorandum ledgers will also need to be updated for the contra entry.

Returns, credit notes and refunds


3.4

Sometimes when a business has made a sale, the customer will return the goods.

3.5

Steps:
(1)

Goods are sold to the customer for $250:


Dr
Cr

(2)

RLCA
Sales

$250
$250

Customer pays for goods:


Dr
Cr

Bank
RLCA

$250
$250

At this point the balance on the receivables ledger control account is nil.

14.8

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


(3)

Customer returns the goods and is issued with a credit note:


Dr
Cr

Sales (returns)
RLCA

$250
$250

This entry reverses the original sale.


The receivables ledger control account will show a credit balance reflecting that the
business owes money to the customer. This could be offset against future purchases
or the customer may request a refund.
(4)

The business refunds the customer:


Dr
Cr

RLCA
Bank

$250
$250

Once again the balance on the receivables ledger control account is nil.
3.6

Again, the memorandum ledgers must also be updated.

Over payment
3.7

If a customer pays too much to settle an invoice or pays an invoice twice the business will
owe the excess to the customer.
This may be held and treated like a credit note or the monies refunded to the customer.

Discounts

4.1

There are two types of discounts:


(a)

(b)

Trade discounts
(i)

given at the time of the sale/purchase, they reduce the selling price as an
inducement to purchase;

(ii)

usually for regular customers or bulk buyers.

Settlement discounts
(a)
(b)

offered, but not necessarily taken, as an inducement to settle a debt early;


eg. 5% discount if settled within 14 days.

Terminology
4.2

Discounts allowed: offered by a seller to their customer.


Discounts received: received by a business from their supplier.

Discounts allowed
4.3

Accounting treatment
Sales are recorded net of (i.e. after) trade discounts but inclusive of (i.e. before) settlement
discounts.
Therefore trade discounts never appear in the financial statements.

14.9

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


Settlement discounts allowed are recorded as discounts allowed and are shown as an
expense in the income statement:
Dr
Cr

Discounts allowed (I/S)


RLCA

Lecture example 2
(a)

Preparation question

On 1 January 20X7 a business made a sale on credit for $12,000. A trade discount of
$2,000 was available with a further 10% settlement discount if payment were made within
10 days.
Required
Record the initial sale.

Solution
The initial sale would be recorded as:
Sales (I/S)

(b)

RLCA (B/S)

On 4.1.X7, the customer pays for the goods taking advantage of the settlement discount.
The discount will be 10% of sales value.
Required
Record the full settlement of the amount owed.

Solution
Bank (B/S)

Discounts allowed (I/S)

14.10

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS


(c)

Required
What would your answer be to part (b) if the settlement discount were not taken?

Solution
Bank (B/S)

RLCA (B/S)

Discounts received
4.4

Accounting treatment
Purchases are recorded net of trade discounts but inclusive of settlement discounts.
Again trade discounts never appear in the financial statements.
Settlement discounts received are recorded as discounts received and are shown as
sundry income in the income statement.
Dr
Cr

PLCA (B/S)
Discounts received (I/S)

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

Ryan Co purchases goods worth $5,000 from Austin Co. Ryan Co will receive a 5% settlement
discount if the goods are paid for within seven days. Ryan Co has every intention of taking
advantage of the settlement discount.
Required
(a)
(b)
(c)

Show the initial recording of the purchase.


Record the payment for the goods assuming Ryan pays within seven days.
Record the payment for the goods if payment is made after seven days.

14.11

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Solution

Sales tax and discounts


4.5

Sales tax is calculated on the amount after all discounts, regardless of whether the
discount is taken or not.

Lecture example 4

Exam standard for 2 marks

Brick buys goods with a list price of $50,000 from Cement. Brick receives a trade discount of 12%
from Cement and a further discount of 4% if payment is made within 10 days. Sales tax is at 15%.
Required
What amount should Brick show in Cement's payables ledger to record this purchase?
A
B
C
D

$48,576
$50,336
$50,600
$57,500

14.12

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Solution

Control account reconciliations

5.1

As mentioned in Section 2 if we add up the balances in the receivables and payables


ledgers, they should agree to the balances per the RLCA and PLCA.
If not, an error must have occurred at some point in the system.
The easiest way to identify the error is to perform a reconciliation between the two amounts.

5.2

Proforma control account reconciliation


RLCA
$
X
Transposition error in posting
X
X
Balance c/d

Balance b/d
Sales day book undercast
Sales omitted from SDB

X
Balance b/d

$
X
X
X

Reconciliation Statement
$
+
Total per listing of receivables ledger
balances
Adjustments
Balance omitted
Credit balance listed as debit

14.13

$
X

X
X

Balance as per adjusted control account

(2X)
X

X
X

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Lecture example 5
(a)

Technique demosntration

Required
Post the following transactions to and balance off the receivables ledger control account.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)

(b)

Opening balance $614,000


Credit sales made during the month $302,600
Receipts from customers $311,000
Bad debts were written off $32,000
Discounts allowed for prompt payment $3,400
Contras against amounts due to suppliers in payables ledger $8,650

The receivables ledger list of balances totals to $563,900.


You have found the following errors:
(i)

The total of the sales day book was undercast by $3,600.

(ii)

A credit balance of $450 was included in the list of balances as a debit.

(iii)

A customer balance of $2,150 was left out when the receivables ledger list of
balances was totalled.

Required
Reconcile the receivables ledger control account to the receivables ledger list of balances.

Solution

14.14

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Summary of Chapter 14

6.1

At any point in time the balance on the receivables ledger control account should equal the
total of all the balances in the receivables ledger. Also the balance on the payables ledger
control account should equal the total of all the balances in the payables ledger. Where the
two balances are not the same an error must have arisen and a reconciliation should be
performed to identify the errors.

6.2

If a customer is also a supplier the two parties may choose to settle their accounts by
making a contra entry. The contra is always for the lower of the two balances.

6.3

Sometimes a business may offer discounts to attract custom. There are two types of
discounts: trade discounts and settlement discounts.

6.4

Sales and purchases are recorded after trade discounts but before settlement
discounts.

6.5

Sales tax is calculated on the amount after all discounts, regardless of whether the
discount is taken or not.

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 14

7.1

Contra entry adjustment:


Dr
Cr

7.2

Adjustment to record settlement discounts allowed to customers:


Dr
Cr

7.3

Payables ledger control account (B/S)


Receivables ledger control account (B/S)

Discounts allowed (I/S)


Receivables ledger control account (B/S)

Adjustment to record settlement discounts received from suppliers:


Dr
Cr

Payables ledger control account (B/S)


Discounts received (I/S)

14.15

14: CONTROL ACCOUNTS

14.16

Chapter 14: Questions

14.17

14: QUESTIONS

Data for Questions 14.1 and 14.2


Womble & Sons have an accounting year ended 31 July 20X8. At that date the balance on the receivables ledger
control account was $130,000, but the total of the individual accounts in the receivables ledger came to
$127,240.
Upon investigation the following facts were discovered:
(i)

The sales day book total for week 22 had been overcast by $600.

(ii)

A credit balance of $420 on Orinocos account had been incorrectly treated as a debit entry when listing
the receivables ledger.

(iii)

A contra of $3,000 has been entered in Bungos account in the receivables ledger but no other entry had
been made.

14.1

The adjusted balance on the receivables ledger control account is:

14.2

14.3

14.4

$125,560

$126,400

$127,240

$129,400

(2 marks)

The adjusted balance on the receivables ledger is:


A

$125,560

$126,400

$127,240

$129,400

(2 marks)

A page of the sales day book is undercast by $250. The journal necessary to correct the error is:
A

Debit trade receivables $500, Credit sales $500

Debit sales $500, Credit trade receivables $500

Debit trade receivables $250, Credit sales $250

Debit sales $250, Credit trade receivables $250

Winn Co has opening trade payables of $24,183 and closing trade payables of $34,665. Purchases for
the period totalled $254,192 ($31,590 relating to cash purchases).
What were total payments recorded in the payables ledger for the period? $

14.5

(2 marks)

(2 marks)

The double entry to record a discount granted by a supplier is:


A

Debit trade payables, Credit discounts allowed

Debit trade payables, Credit discounts received

Debit discounts received, Credit trade payables

Debit trade payables, Credit purchases

14.18

(2 marks)

14: QUESTIONS

14.6

The following receivables ledger reconciliation has been prepared by the bookkeeper of Julian Co as at
31 October 20X7:
$
26,170
1,740
(1,220)
300
26,990

Total per listing of receivables ledger balances


Debit balance omitted
Credit listed as debit
Unexplained difference
Balance per control account
Which of the following errors could have produced the unexplained difference?

14.7

A refund of $300 was omitted from the receivables ledger.

The sales day book for October was undercast by $300.

The trade receivables column of the cash receipts book was overcast by $300.

A payables ledger contra of $300 was not entered in the memorandum records.

(2 marks)

Justin has attempted to write up his own nominal ledger but is very confused about debits and credits. He
realises he has made some mistakes and has asked you to correct the following receivables ledger
control account:
Receivables ledger control account
Balance b/d
Sales on credit
Purchase ledger contra

$
12,460
15,520
1,600
29,580

Cash sales
Cheques from credit customers
Discounts allowed
Balance c/d

$
4,430
11,650
890
12,610
29,580

The opening balance is correct. What should the closing balance be?

14.8

$9,410

$13,840

$15,620

$17,040

(2 marks)

Which of the following is not a valid reason for a credit balance on a customer's account in the
receivables ledger?
A

Over payment

Cheque dishonoured by bank

Returned goods credited to account

(1 mark)

14.19

14: QUESTIONS

14.9

During April a company receives an invoice for $12,000 relating to goods bought on credit. These
purchases qualify for a 5% trade discount which has not yet been taken into account. The company also
sells goods with a list price of $20,000. A 6% trade discount is to be offered on these goods. Sales tax is
applicable to all items and is at 15%. Sales tax is not included in the above amounts. If there is no
opening balance on the sales tax account at the beginning of April, what is the closing balance at the end
of April?
A

$1,110 Cr

$1,110 Dr

$1,200 Cr

$1,200 Dr

(2 marks)

14.10 The following transactions were recorded in a companys books during one week of its trading year:
$
Trade purchases (at list price)
4,500
Sales on credit (at list price)
6,000
Purchase of a van
10,460
A trade discount of $300 was given on the sales. All figures are given exclusive of sales tax at 15%.
If the balance on the sales tax account was $2,165 credit at the beginning of the week, what is the
balance at the end of the week? $
(2 marks)
14.11 Thomas
Thomas is a sole trader. He has been reading a book on basic bookkeeping but his grasp of the subject is
weak.
He has produced the following receivables ledger control account but is not sure whether his closing
balance is correct.

Balance b/d 1.1.X6


Discounts allowed
Cash paid to customers with
credit balances
Sales
Returns inwards
Purchase ledger contras
Balance b/d 1.1.X7

Receivables ledger control account


$
12,240
Cheques received from customers
2,165
Cheques dishonoured by customers
Irrecoverable debts
180
Allowance for receivables
71,250
Cash received from customers
2,250
230
Balance c/d 31.12.X6
88,315
10,350

Required
Produce a corrected receivables ledger control account.

14.20

$
74,730
425
470
1,470
870
10,350
88,315

14: QUESTIONS

14.12 Duff
On 31 December 20X7 the balance on Duffs receivables ledger control account was $1,070, but the
receivables ledger balances totalled only $890.
You ascertain the following:
(1)

The sales day book was overcast by $100 on 1 December 20X7.

(2)

Receivables ledger balances totalling $70 had been omitted from the list.

(3)

A contra entry of $20 had been made between the payables ledger and receivables ledger
accounts of Jones & Co, but no other entry had been made.

(4)

The only posting made in respect of sales on 15 December 20X7, $50 in total, had been to
individual ledger accounts.

(5)

$60 worth of goods had been returned by Smith Co in November; this had been recorded only in
the control account.

(6)

The ledger account balance of Davis & Co had been listed as $90, but was in fact $190.

Required
Prepare a reconciliation between the receivables ledger control account and the receivables ledger.

14.21

14: QUESTIONS

14.22

Chapter 14: Answers

14.23

14: ANSWERS

14.1 B

Receivables ledger control account


Balance b/d

$
130,000

SDB overcast
Contra
balance c/d

130,000
14.2 B

Receivables Ledger

$
600
3,000
126,400
130,000
$

Balance per list of balances


Credit balance treated as a debit
(2 $420)

127,240
(840)
126,400

14.3 C
14.4

$212,120

Trade payables
$
Bal b/d

Payments
Bal c/d

212,120
34,665

Purchases
($254,192 $31,590)

246,785

$
24,183
222,602
246,785

Bal b/d

34,665

14.5 B
14.6 A

Day book total has no effect on the receivables ledger, where individual invoice
amounts will be entered.

Cash book total has no effect on receivables ledger.

If a contra had been omitted, the receivables ledger total would have to be reduced by
$300.

14.7 B

Receivables ledger control account


Balance b/d
Sales on credit

$
12,460
15,520

Purchase ledger contra


Cheques from credit customers
Discounts allowed
Balance c/d

27,980
Note: Cash sales are not recorded in the control account
14.8

This would leave a debit balance as the original debt would be reinstated.

14.24

$
1,600
11,650
890
13,840
27,980

14: ANSWERS

14.9

$
Input sales tax
$12,000 95% 15%

1,710

Output sales tax


$20,000 94% 15%

(2,820)

Closing balance on sales tax account at end of April

(1,110) Cr

14.10 $776 Cr
$2,165 + [15% ($6,000 $3,000)] [15% $4,500] [15% $10,460] = $776
14.11 Thomas
Receivables ledger control account
Balance b/d
Cash cheque dishonoured
Cash credit balances
Sales

$
12,240
425
180
71,250

$
Cheques
Irrecoverable debts
Cash received
Discounts allowed
Returns inwards
Purchase ledger contras
Balance c/d

74,730
470
870
2,165
2,250
230
3,380
84,095

84,095
14.12 Duff
Receivables ledger control account
Balance b/d
Sales 15.12.X7 (4)

$
1,070
50

$
100
20
1,000
1,120

SDB Overcast (1)


Purchase ledger contra (3)
Amended balance c/d

1,120
Balance b/d

1,000

Receivables ledger reconciliation statement


$
890

Total balance per receivables ledger


$
+
70

Adjustments:
Balances omitted (2)
Goods returned (5)
Balance understated (6)

100
170

Amended total

14.25

60
60

110
1,000

14: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

14.26

Bank reconciliations

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the purpose of bank reconciliations.

Identify the main reasons for differences between the cash book and the bank statement.

Correct cash book errors and/or omissions.

Prepare bank reconciliation statements and identify the bank balance to be reported in the final accounts.

Derive bank statement and cash book balances from given information.

Exam Context
Exam questions are likely to ask you to perform calculations to correct a bank reconciliation. Alternatively they may ask
you to state whether differences between the cash book and the bank statement should be adjusted in the cash book or
in the reconciliation statement.

Qualification Context
This chapter covers a topic which is only examined in Paper F3.

15.1

15: BANK RECONCILIATIONS

Overview
Bank reconciliations

Cash book balance

Bank statement balance

Differences

Timing differences

Errors by the business

15.2

Errors by the bank

15: BANK RECONCILIATIONS

Introduction

1.1

This chapter is designed to enable you to explain and apply the approach to identifying and
correcting errors through the use of bank reconciliations.

1.2

The cash book is used to record the detailed transactions of receipts and payments into and
out of the bank account. These are then posted to the nominal ledger periodically using
double entry. At the end of each accounting period, the balance on the cash book should
equal the balance in the nominal ledger cash account.

1.3

Bank statements provide an independent record of the balance on the bank account but this
balance is unlikely to agree exactly to the cash book balance therefore a reconciliation is
required.

Differences between the cash book balance and the bank statement
1.4

Differences essentially occur for three reasons:


(a)

(b)

Timing differences:
(i)

unrecorded lodgements (money paid into the bank by the business but not
yet appearing as a receipt on bank statement)

(ii)

outstanding/unpresented cheques (cheques paid out by business which


have not yet appeared on bank statement).

Errors by the business (i.e. in the cash book):


(i)

omissions, such as:


standing orders
direct debits
bank charges
interest

(c)

(ii)

transposition errors

(iii)

casting errors

Errors by the bank.

A word of warning
1.5
In the books of the business:
POSITIVE BANK BALANCE = ASSET = DEBIT
NEGATIVE BANK BALANCE (OVERDRAFT) = LIABILITY = CREDIT
But from the banks point of view:
POSITIVE BALANCE = LIABILITY = CREDIT (the bank owes you your money)
NEGATIVE BALANCE (OVERDRAFT) = ASSET = DEBIT
(you owe the bank this is an asset for the bank)

15.3

15: BANK RECONCILIATIONS

Preparing a bank reconciliation

Procedures
2.1

(a)
(b)

Compare the bank statement to the cash account and tick off all items which agree.
Remaining items must represent timing differences or errors decide which!

Example of how to set out a bank reconciliation


2.2
Cash account
$
X
Dishonoured cheque
Bank charges
Standing orders
X
Direct debits
Balance c/d
X

Balance b/d
Under cast error in balance b/d

$
X
X
X
X
X
X
$
X
X
(X)
X/(X)

Balance per bank statement


plus unrecorded lodgements
less outstanding cheques
plus/less bank errors
Balance per adjusted cash account

Practical tips
2.3

(a)

On reconciliation, put overdrafts and payments in brackets.

(b)

It is the corrected cash account balance which is shown on the balance sheet. This
figure will be the recalculated 'Balance c/d' on the cash account (or the total at the
end of the reconciliation statement which should be identical!).

15.4

15: BANK RECONCILIATIONS

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

The cash account of Graham showed a debit balance of $204 on 31 March 20X8. A comparison
with the bank statements revealed the following.
$
(1) Cheques drawn but not presented
3,168
(2)

Amounts paid into the bank but not credited

(3)

Entries in the bank statements not recorded in the cash account


(i)
Standing order payments
(ii) Interest on bank deposit account
(iii) Bank charges

(4)

Balance on the bank statement at 31 March 20X8

723
35
18
14
2,618

Required
Make any necessary adjustments to the cash book balance and complete the bank reconciliation
statement as at 31 March 20X8.

Solution
Adjustment of cash book balance
Cash account
$

Bank reconciliation statement


$
Balance per bank statement 31 March 20X8
Unrecorded lodgements
Outstanding cheques
Balance per cash account at 31 March 20X8

15.5

15: BANK RECONCILIATIONS

Lecture example 2

Exam standard for 2 marks

Whilst preparing a bank reconciliation statement at 31 December. The following items caused a
difference between the bank statement balance and the cash book balance.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

Bank interest charged to the account in error


Direct debit for $500 for insurance
Bank charges of $70
Cheque paid to a supplier on 29 December
Receipt from a trade receivable by electronic transfer

Required
Which of these items will be shown in the bank reconciliation?
A
B
C
D

2, 3, and 5
1 and 4
1, 4, and 5
1, 3 and 5

Solution

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 15

3.1

A business maintains a cash book to tell it how much cash it has at a particular point in time.
It should reconcile this balance to the bank statement in order to ensure the cash book
information is accurate.

3.2

Differences between the cash book balance and the bank statement balance will arise for
three reasons: timing differences, errors by the business and errors by the bank.

15.6

Chapter 15: Questions

15.7

15: QUESTIONS

Data for Questions 15.1 and 15.2


In the books of Ted Co the bank account shows a balance overdrawn of $6,530 as at 31 December 20X8. On
comparing the bank statements with the cash book the following items are discovered:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

Bank charges of $100 and overdraft interest of $50 have been omitted.
Cheques received from customers totalling $1,900 have not yet been cleared by the bank.
Cheques drawn in favour of suppliers amounting to $2,300 are outstanding at the year end.
A credit transfer from a customer of $2,000 was not recorded.
A direct debit to a supplier of $1,000 was omitted.

15.1

What figure will be shown in the balance sheet as at 31 December 20X8 for bank overdraft?

15.2

15.3

$5,480

$5,680

$6,130

$7,380

(2 marks)

Assuming that the above items are all that is required to reconcile the cash book balance to the balance
per the bank statement, what balance did the bank statement show as at 31 December 20X8?
A

$5,280 overdrawn

$6,080 overdrawn

$7,780 overdrawn

$8,580 overdrawn

(2 marks)

Rectify
A summary of the cash book of Rectify Co for the year to 31 May 20X5 is as follows:

Opening balance b/d


Receipts

$
805
145,720
146,525

Cash Book
Payments
Closing balance c/d

$
146,203
322
146,525

After some investigation of the cash book and vouchers you discover that:
(1)

bank charges of $143 shown on the bank statement have not yet been entered in the cash book;

(2)

a cheque drawn for $98 has been entered in the cash book as $89, and another drawn at $230
has been entered as a receipt;

(3)

a cheque received from a customer for $180 has been returned by the bank marked refer to
drawer, but it has not yet been written back in the cash book;

(4)

an error of transposition has occurred in that the opening balance of the cash book should have
been brought down at $850;

(5)

cheques paid to suppliers totalling $630 have not yet been presented at the bank, whilst payments
in to the bank of $580 on 31 May 20X5 have not yet been credited to the companys account;

(6)

a cheque for $82 has been debited to the companys account in error by the bank;

(7)

the company owes $430 to the electricity board;

(8)

standing orders appearing on the bank statement have not yet been entered in the cash book:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

interest for the half year to 31 March on a loan of $20,000 at 11% pa;
hire purchase repayments on the managing directors car 12 months at $55 per month;
dividend received on a trade investment $1,147;

15.8

15: QUESTIONS

(9)

a page of the receipts side of the cash book has been undercast by $200;

(10)

the bank statement shows a balance overdrawn of $870.

Required
Prepare a bank reconciliation as at 31 May 20X5.

15.9

15: QUESTIONS

15.10

Chapter 15: Answers

15.11

15: ANSWERS

15.1 B

15.2

15.3

Unadjusted cash book balance

$
(6,530)

Corrections to cash book


(i)
interest (100 + 50)
(iv) unrecorded cash received
(v)
payment to supplier omitted
Adjusted cash book balance

(150)
2,000
(1,000)
(5,680)

Adjusted cash book balance


Less: unrecorded lodgements
Add: outstanding cheques
Balance per bank statement

$
(5,680)
(1,900)
2,300
(5,280)

Rectify
Bank
$

$
Balance b/d

322

Error in opening balance (4) (850 805)


Dividend received (8iii)

45
1,147

Undercast (9)

200

Balance c/d

838

Bank charges (1)

143

Cheque drawn entered as $89 (2)


(98 89)

Cheque drawn entered as receipt (2)


(2 $230)

460

Cheque returned written back (3)

180

Loan interest (8i)

1,100

HP repayments (8ii)

660
2,552

2,552
Bank reconciliation statement as at 31 May 20X5
Balance per bank statement

$
(870)

Add: lodgements not yet credited

580

Less: outstanding cheques

(630)

Add: cheque wrongly debited by bank

O/D

82

Balance per cash book

(838)

END OF CHAPTER

15.12

O/D

Correction of errors

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Identify the types of error which may occur in bookkeeping systems.

Identify errors which would be highlighted by the extraction of a trial balance.

Prepare journal entries to correct errors.

Calculate and understand the impact of errors on the income statement and balance sheet.

Understand the purpose of a suspense account.

Identify errors leading to the creation of a suspense account.

Record entries in a suspense account and make journal entries to clear it.

Exam Context
Questions on this area are likely to focus on three main areas. You may be asked to identify which explanations could
have led to a particular difference or be asked to identify the journal entry to correct an error. You may also need to
determine the effect errors may have on the profit figure.

Qualification Context
This topic is only tested in Financial Accounting.

16.1

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Overview

Types of error

Correction of errors

Suspense account

Adjustments to profit

16.2

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Introduction

1.1

Chapter 6 showed us how the trial balance was extracted from the ledger accounts and that
it should balance, i.e. total debits should equal total credits.

1.2

If the trial balance doesn't balance then an error has definitely been made and must be
corrected.

Types of error

2.1

The following errors will still allow the trial balance to balance.
Type of error

Section 1

Example

Error of omission

Error of commission

Error of principle

Compensating error

2.2

The trial balance will not balance if total debits do not equal total credits.
This could be due to the following:
(1)

Transposition error

(2)

An entry has been posted where


(a)

debits credits

(b)

a debit entry has been posted and no corresponding credit made (or vice
versa)

16.3

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS


(c)

two debit entries or two credit entries have been posted.

These errors will be corrected by creating a suspense account and making a journal entry
to correct the error.

Suspense accounts

3.1

A suspense account is a temporary account. They never appear in the final accounts.

3.2

It is used for two main reasons:

3.3

(1)

To account for a debit or credit entry when the accountant is unsure as to where it
should go

(2)

To make a preliminary trial balance balance when an error has been detected.

Steps to clear a suspense account.


(1)
(2)
(3)

3.4

Determine the original accounting entry which was made.


Decide what entry should have been made.
Make the required adjustment.

Illustration
W Co sold goods with a value of $2,500 to James, a credit customer. When recording the
sale W Co posted the transaction to the correct accounts but made two debit entries.
Steps
(1)

Entry made was:


Dr
Dr

(2)

$2,500
$2,500

Entry should have been:


Dr
Cr

(3)

Trade receivables
Sales
Trade receivables
Sales

$2,500
$2,500

Correction:
The trade receivables entry is correct but sales have been debited by $2,500 when
they should have been credited by that amount.
The correction is therefore twice the original error:
Dr
Cr

Suspense account
Sales (2 $2,500)

$5,000
$5,000

Being: correction of sales posting.

16.4

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Lecture example 1

Technique demonstration

Dan, the bookkeeper of Tiffany's, has made his usual mess of things and produced the following
attempt at a trial balance for the year ended 30 April 20X7.
$
Property, plant and equipment
At cost
Provision for depreciation
Capital at 1 May 20X6
Profit for the year
Inventory, at cost
Receivables ledger control account
Payables ledger control account
Balance at bank

60,000
31,000
53,000
12,300
14,000
9,600
6,500
1,640
85,240

102,800

As chief accountant you discover the following:


(1)

A rent payment of $350 in March 20X7 had been debited in the receivables ledger control
account.

(2)

Discounts allowed of $500 during the year ended 30 April 20X7 had not been recorded in
the books.

(3)

No entry had been made for the refund of $2,620 made by cheque to V Woolf in March
20X7, in respect of defective goods returned to Tiffany. V Woolf, who had already paid for
the goods, returned them on 28 February 20X7.

(4)

The total column of the cash receipts book had been overcast by $1,900 in March 20X7.

(5)

The purchase of stationery for $1,460 cash in June 20X6 has not been posted to the
appropriate expense account.

(6)

Capital of $35,000 was recorded incorrectly as $53,000.

Required
Prepare
(a)

Journal entries to correct the above errors;

(b)

A suspense account showing how it is cleared.

16.5

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Solution

16.6

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Adjustments to profit

4.1

When errors are corrected they may affect the business' profit for the year figure.

4.2

For example in Lecture example 1, item 5 tells us that a stationery expense of $1,460 has
not been recorded in the expense account.
The profit for the year figure in the trial balance of $12,300 is therefore too high and needs
to be corrected.

4.3

This is done by using a statement of adjustments to profit.

Proforma
4.4

$
+
Original profit
Adjustment:
(a) over depreciation
(b) unrecorded expense
(c) unrecorded sale

$
X

X
X
X
X

(X)

Adjusted profit

Lecture example 2

X
X

Technique demonstration

Required
Prepare a statement of adjustments to profit for Lecture example 1.

Solution
Statement of adjustments to profit for the year ended 30 April 20X7.
Increases
$
Draft profit
Adjustments

Revised profit

16.7

Decreases
$

16: CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Lecture example 3

Exam standard for 2 marks

Z Co's income statement showed a profit of $112,400 for the year ended 30 September 20X7. The
following errors were later discovered:
(1)

Sales returns of $2,700 had been recorded as a new sale.

(2)

A machine which had been held for two years and had originally cost $15,000 was
depreciated this year using a 33 31 % reducing balance basis. Z Co's policy is to depreciate
machines over four years.

Required
What would be the net profit after adjusting for these errors?
A

$103,250

$105,750

$105,950

$108,450

Solution

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 16

5.1

Some errors, such as errors of omission and errors of principle, will still allow the trial
balance to balance.

5.2

Where the trial balance does not balance a suspense account will be inserted and the
errors, once identified, will be corrected via a journal entry.

5.3

Some of these corrections may impact the business profit; in this case a statement of
adjustments to profit can be prepared to determine the revised profit figure.

16.8

Chapter 16: Questions

16.9

16: QUESTIONS

16.1

16.2

16.3

16.4

16.5

Which of the following errors could result in a suspense account being required to balance the trial
balance?
A

Cash received from receivables treated as a cash sale

Payments to suppliers of $513 recorded as $531 in the payables ledger

A suppliers invoice for $19 recorded as $91 in the purchases account

(1 mark)

Duncan corrected the following errors before producing his final balance sheet. What was the balance on
the suspense account before he did this?
(i)

Sales day book for March overcast by $63.

(ii)

Cash receipts from receivables of $713 posted to the receivables ledger control account as $731.

(iii)

Cash received from the issue of $1,000 debentures at par had been posted to a suspense
account.

$982

Dr

$982

Cr

$1,018 Dr

$1,018 Cr

(2 marks)

Russells bookkeeper transposed some figures when the weeks cash payments were being posted to the
nominal ledger. Payments for staff wages of $125 were posted to the wages account as $152 and
payments of $31 for stationery were posted to the stationery expense account as $13. The entry required
to correct this is
A

Dr stationery $18

Dr suspense $9

Cr wages $27

Dr wages $27

Dr stationery $18

Cr suspense $45

Dr wages $27

Cr stationery $18

Cr suspense $9

Dr suspense $45

Cr wages $27

Cr stationery $18

(2 marks)

Which of the following errors would cause a trial balance imbalance?


(i)
(ii)
(iii)

The discounts received column of the cash payments book was overcast.
Cash paid for the purchase of office furniture was debited to the general expenses account.
Returns inwards were included on the credit side of the trial balance.

(i) only

(i) and (ii)

(iii) only

all of the errors

(2 marks)

If sales of $150 has been wrongly entered on the debit side of the purchases account, but correctly
entered in the trade receivables account, the totals on the trial balance would show:
A

The debit side to be $150 more than the credit side

The debit side to be $300 more than the credit side

The debit side to be $150 less than the credit side

The debit and credit sides to be equal in value

16.10

(2 marks)

16: QUESTIONS

16.6

Platinum Co
Platinum Co, a manufacturer of electrical goods, has just produced its draft accounts for the year ended
30 September 20X7. These show a draft profit of $28,960.
Unfortunately, the accountant has since discovered the following matters which require consideration
before the final accounts can be prepared:
(1)

Returns outwards to Metals Co in June 20X7 of $490 have been treated as returns inwards in
error in the nominal ledger.

(2)

R. Silverman, a customer owing $1,850 has gone bankrupt. Full allowance had been made
against this amount in Platinum's accounts for the year ended 30 September 20X6.

(3)

An item of equipment with a net book value of $6,000 (cost $10,000) was sold for $5,000 in
September 20X7. The proceeds were included in cash and credited to the motor expenses
account. No other entries were made.

(4)

An amount owing from Aluminium Co of $780 was written off in January 20X7. The amount was
removed from trade receivables and debited to the sales account.

Required
Calculate the corrected profit for the year ended 30 September 20X7.

16.11

16: QUESTIONS

16.12

Chapter 16: Answers

16.13

16: ANSWERS

16.1

16.2 B
Suspense account
Transposition error (731 713)
Bal c/d
16.3

16.4

16.5

16.6

Platinum Co
(a)

18 Cash from debentures


982
1,000
Bal b/d

1,000
1,000
982

Statement of corrected profit for the year ended 30 September 20X7.


$

Draft profit

(1)
(2)
(3)

980

(4)

Returns outwards ($490 x 2)


No effect
Disposal of machine
($5,000 + $1,000)
No effect

$
28,960

6,000

980
Revised profit

END OF CHAPTER

16.14

(6,000)

(5,020)
23,940

Preparation of
financial statements for
sole traders

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Prepare extracts of an opening trial balance.

Prepare journal entries to correct errors.

Record entries in a suspense account

Make journal entries to clear a suspense account

Prepare extracts of a balance sheet and income statement from given information.

Exam Context
This chapter recaps some of the key skills you have learnt in the chapters covered to date. Whilst you will not be asked
to produce a balance sheet or an income statement in the real exam any of the adjustments in this chapter could be
tested as an individual question. This chapter will also help you to see how financial accounting fits together.

Qualification Context
The skills to produce a balance sheet and an income statement are tested in detail in the Fundamentals level paper,
Financial Reporting (F7).

17.1

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS

Overview

Preparation of financial
statements for sole traders

Trial balance

Adjustments

Suspense account

Income Statement and


Balance Sheet

17.2

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS

Introduction

1.1

The purpose of this chapter is to recap some of the skills covered in Chapters 116.

1.2

You will not be required to answer a question in the format of Lecture example 1 in the
exam. However completing this exercise will revise your understanding of topics covered so
far and enable you to see the end product a business' transactions ordered into a set of
financial statements.

Lecture example 1

Technique demonstation

You have been given the information below and asked to prepare the accounts of Mugg for the
year ended 31 December 20X7.
Trial balance as at 31 December 20X7.
Dr
$
Capital account at 1 January 20X7
Rent
Inventories 1 January 20X7
Electricity
Insurance
Wages
Trade receivables
Sales
Repairs
Purchases
Discounts received
Drawings
Petty cash
Bank
Motor vehicles at cost
Furniture and fixtures at cost
Accumulated depreciation at 1 January 20X7
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fixtures
Travel and entertaining
Trade payables
Suspense account

Cr
$
2,377

500
510
240
120
1,634
672
15,542
635
9,876
129
1,200
5
762
1,740
830
435
166
192
700
433
19,349

19,349

The following information is also available:


(1)

Closing inventories, valued at cost, amounts to $647;

(2)

Mugg has drawn $10 a month and these drawings have been charged to wages;

(3)

Depreciation is to be provided at 25% on cost on motor vehicles, and 20% on cost on


furniture and fixtures;

(4)

Bad debts totalling $37 are to be written off;


17.3

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS


(5)

$180 received from a credit customer was correctly entered in the trade receivables account
and credited to the bank account;

(6)

Mugg has taken goods from inventories for his own use. When purchased by his business
these goods cost $63 and they would have been sold for $91;

(7)

The annual rental of the business premises is $600, and $180 paid for electricity in August
20X7 covers the 12 months to 30 June 20X8;

(8)

Discounts allowed of $73 have only been recorded in the trade payables account.

Required
(a)

Prepare journal entries to record items (1) (8).

(b)

Clear the suspense account.

(c)

Produce an income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7 and a balance sheet
as at that date.

Solution
(a)

Journals
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

17.4

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS


(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(b)
Suspense account
$

17.5

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS


(c)

Mugg
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7
$

Accumulated
depreciation
$

NBV
$

Sales
Less: cost of sales
Opening inventories
Purchases
Less: closing inventories
Gross profit
Discounts received
Less: expenses:
Rent
Electricity
Insurance
Wages
Repairs
Depreciation
Travel and entertaining
Bad debts
Discounts allowed
Profit for the period
Mugg
Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X7
Cost
$
Non-current assets
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fixtures
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Prepayments
Cash and bank balances
Capital
Capital as at 1 January 20X7
Profit for the period
Less: drawings
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals

17.6

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 17

2.1

The balance sheet and income statement are the end product produced by a business. All
the business transactions need to be categorised into the books of prime entry and posted
to the nominal ledger. The trial balance is then extracted and some adjustments may need
to be made before the financial statements are drawn up.

2.2

You will not have to produce a balance sheet or income statement however this chapter
should reinforce your understanding of Chapters 1 16.

17.7

17: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR SOLE TRADERS

17.8

Chapter 17: Question

17.9

17: QUESTION

17.1

Drawings are an expense of the business. Is this statement true or false?


A

True

False

(1 mark)

17.10

Chapter 17: Answer

17.11

17: ANSWER

17.1

END OF CHAPTER

17.12

Incomplete records

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand and apply techniques used in incomplete record situations:


(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

use of accounting equation


use of ledger accounts to calculate missing figures
use of cash and/or bank summaries
use of profit percentages to calculate missing figures

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter will require you to identify missing figures, for example sales, closing inventories and
drawings. The Pilot Paper included two questions asking you to derive the value of closing inventories using information
about the gross profit margin earned by the business.

Qualification Context
This topic is only tested in Financial Accounting.

Business Context
Some sole traders do not keep very detailed accounting records. They still however need to produce accounts so they
know how their business is performing and also how much tax to pay to the tax authorities. The preparation of accounts
from incomplete records can generate a lot of income for smaller accountancy practices.

18.1

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Overview

Margin

Cost structures

Mark-up

Incomplete records

Techniques for solving


incomplete records

Derive missing figures from


given information

Sales

Purchases

Drawings

18.2

Inventory

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Issue

1.1

Individuals running small businesses such as a newsagent or greengrocer may not keep all
of the accounting records we have studied or have a detailed understanding of double entry
bookkeeping.

1.2

They still need to know how the business is performing and so will produce financial
statements. If some necessary information isn't maintained by the business, it will need to
be derived from other available information.

Cost structures

2.1

Cost structure information is usually expressed in one of two ways, either as a margin or a
mark-up.
(a)

Margin:

here gross profit is expressed as a percentage of sales, for example a


margin of 25% gives:
Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit

(b)

Mark-up:

100%
75%
25%

here gross profit is expressed as a percentage of cost of sales, for


example a mark-up of 35% gives:
Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit

2.2

135%
100%
35%

Remember that:
Cost of sales = opening inventories + purchases closing inventories

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

W Co has on average a profit margin of 40%. In 20X7 sales total $476,000.


Required
What is cost of sales?

Workings

18.3

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

Y Co operates with a standard mark-up of 30% and has the following information available for
20X7.
$
Sales
221,000
Opening inventories
43,000
Closing inventories
47,500
Required
What is the value for purchases in 20X7?

Workings

Lecture example 3

Exam standard for 2 marks

On 1 January 20X7 J Co had inventory of $620,000. Sales for the month amounted to $985,000
and purchases were $700,000. At the end of January a fire in the warehouse destroyed some
inventory items. The owners salvaged inventory valued at $180,000. J Co operates with a mark up
of 25%.
What is the cost of inventory destroyed in the fire?
A
B
C
D

$335,000
$352,000
$401,250
$532,000

Solution

18.4

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Other techniques for solving incomplete records

Lecture example 4

Preparation question

A Co has recorded the following details relating to trade payables:


Balance at

1.1.X7
31.12.X7

Cash paid from till


Payments from bank

$
38,450
43,825
430
167,224

Required
Based on the information above what was the value of purchases made during the year?
$
Workings
Trade payables
$

18.5

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Lecture example 5

Preparation question

B Co maintains a cash float of $50. In 20X7, all receipts from credit customers were banked, after
the following payments from the till had been made:
$
4,500
6,250

General expenses
Drawings

Total bankings in the year amounted to $28,454, and opening and closing trade receivables were
$1,447 and $1,928 respectively.
Required
Based on the information above what was the value of sales made during the year? $
Workings
Cash

Trade receivables

18.6

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Lecture example 6

Exam standard for 2 marks

Bob owns and manages B Co although he does not keep detailed accounting records.
All of Bob's sales are for cash. He pays certain expenses from his till and then banks the remaining
funds.
Bob maintains a $1,000 float and operates with a margin of 20%. He has provided you with the
following information.
$
20,000
100
500
1,200
12,800
2,000
3,000

Purchases of goods
Wages for clerical assistant (per week)
Stationery
Electricity
Bankings
Opening inventories
Closing inventories

Bob is unsure of the level of drawings taken during the year but estimates they were between $60
and $90 per week.
Required
What were Bob's drawings during the year?
Workings

18.7

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Goods drawn by proprietor

4.1

The owners of the business may at times take goods or cash from the business for their own
use. We have seen these before as drawings.
In incomplete records questions these drawings need to be included.
Cash drawings
Dr
Cr

Drawings
Cash

Goods taken for own use


Dr
Cr

Drawings
Purchases

These are recorded at the cost to the business not at sale price.
They are taken out of purchases and not recorded against inventories.
Note: If you are using a trade payables T account to calculate purchases remember to
adjust purchases for any goods taken by proprietor.

Example
4.2

During the year ended 31 December 20X7, Peter Albert, a sole trader, carried out the
following transactions:

$
4,000
2,700

Sales (40 units @ $100)


Purchases (45 units @ $60)
His inventories (at cost) were:
1 January 20X7
31 December 20X7

(5 units @ $60)
(8 units @ $60)

$
300
480

During the year he had withdrawn two units for his own use. Firstly, ignoring the drawings,
an outline trading account would appear as follows:
$
$
Sales
4,000
Cost of sales
Opening inventories
300
Purchases
2,700
3,000
Less: closing inventories
(480)
2,520
Gross profit
1,480
How should the drawings of goods be treated?

18.8

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS


It should be fairly obvious that the debit entry will be to drawings on the balance sheet, but
what about the credit entry? It will not, as you might initially think, go to inventories (because
these goods were not in hand at the year end so they are not included in the value of $480)
but rather to purchases (as this is where they will have been previously recorded).
In the trading account, this credit entry is often shown as a separate deduction from cost of
sales, i.e.:
$
$
Sales
4,000
Cost of sales
Opening inventories
300
Purchases
2,700
Less: goods drawn by proprietor
2 units @ $60
(120)
2,880
Less: closing inventories
(480)
2,400
Gross profit
1,600

Points to note

Quick Quiz

4.3

(a)
(b)

Drawings of goods are recorded at cost.


Gross profit figure now makes sense, i.e. profit of $40 per unit 40 units sold.

Summary of Chapter 18

5.1

Not all businesses keep proper accounting records, however all businesses need to know
how much profit they have made in a particular year so that they can pay the relevant
amount of tax over to the tax authorities.

5.2

Where a business does not have sufficient records to produce financial statements they
need to piece together the missing information.

5.3

A margin is where a business expresses gross profit as a percentage of sales.

5.4

A mark-up is where gross profit is expressed as a percentage of cost of sales.

5.5

A business is a separate entity from its owner which means that any monies or goods taken
out of the business for personal use must be classified as drawings. Drawings of goods
are recorded at cost.

18.9

18: INCOMPLETE RECORDS

Double Entry Summary for Chapter 18

6.1

Adjustment to record cash drawings:


Dr
Cr

6.2

Drawings (B/S)
Cash (B/S)

Adjustment to record drawings of goods:


Dr
Cr

Drawings (B/S)
Purchases (I/S)

18.10

Chapter 18: Questions

18.11

18: QUESTIONS

18.1

If a business has sales of $6,000 and a margin of 20%, what is the gross profit? $
(1 mark)

18.2

18.3

A trader has budgeted sales for the coming year of $300,000. He achieves a constant mark-up of 25% on
cost. He plans to reduce his inventory level by $14,000 over the year. How much will his purchases for
the year be?
A

$211,000

$239,000

$226,000

$254,000

(2 marks)

A business has opening inventories of $273 and makes purchases during the year of $2,781. The
proprietor removes goods costing $87 for his own use. The business achieves a constant mark-up of 20%
on cost and records sales for the year of $3,360.
What is the cost of closing inventories? $

18.4

(2 marks)

Jethro sold goods for $157,470 during the year ended 31 October 20X7. Inventories at that date were
valued at $8,920 more than at the previous year end. Jethro prices his goods to give a mark-up of 45%.
What was the total value of purchases in the year ended 31 October 20X7?
A

$77,689

$95,529

$99,680

$117,520

(2 marks)

18.12

Chapter 18: Answers

18.13

18: ANSWERS

18.1 $1,200
$6,000 0.2 = $1,200
18.2 C

$
100
Cost of sales = $300,000
125

240,000

Less: decrease in inventories

(14,000)
226,000

18.3 $167
Cost of sales
100
$3,360
120

$
2,800

Less: opening inventories


purchases (2,781 87)
closing inventories
18.4 D

Cost of sales
purchases

(273)
(2,694)
167

= $157,470 x 100/145 = $108,600


= $108,600 + $8,920
= $117,520

END OF CHAPTER

18.14

Partnerships

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand and identify the typical content of a partnership agreement, including profit sharing terms.

Understand the nature of capital accounts, current accounts and division of profits.

Calculate and record the partners' shares of profits/losses.

Account for guaranteed minimum profit shares.

Calculate and record


(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

partners' drawings
interest on drawings
interest on capital
partner salaries

Prepare an extract of a capital account and a current account.

Prepare extracts of the income statement, including division of profit, and balance sheet of a partnership.

Define goodwill in relation to partnership accounts and identify the factors leading to the creation of goodwill.

Calculate the value of goodwill from given information.

Exam Context
Questions on this topic are likely to require you to calculate a partner's profit share. This may include dealing with
partners' salaries, interest on capital and drawings and loan interest. You may also need to allocate goodwill to partners
when a new partner is admitted.

Qualification Context
Partnerships are only examined in this paper.

Business Context
Many individuals set up business as a sole trader as they expand they need new finance. One way of obtaining this is
to go into partnership with someone else. That other person could provide some of the finance needed. They may also
bring new ideas to the table. Becoming a partnership will mean that the sole trader will share some of their risk but they
will also need to share their profits too!
It is always recommended that a partnership agreement is drawn up to retain a legal record of how the partnership will
operate.

19.1

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Overview
Partnership agreements

Appropriation account

Partnerships

Capital accounts

Current accounts

Guaranteed minimum
profit share

19.2

Other issues

Loans

Goodwill

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Definition

1.1

Partnership:

1.2

Partnerships are similar to sole traders. With a sole trader the owner will run the business
and any profits belong to him. The sole trader also bears the risk that the business may not
be successful.

The relationship which exists between two or more persons carrying on


a business with a view to profit.

In a partnership, the owners (partners) run the business together and share profits and risk.
1.3

Most partnerships have unlimited liability which means the partners are personally liable
for the debts of the business.
Liability is also joint and several so if one partner cannot meet the partnership's obligations
the other partners must make up any shortfall.

1.4

Limited liability partnerships (LLPs) exist nowadays to limit partner liability. These are
outside the scope of the F3 syllabus.

Partnership agreements
The partners will need to agree the terms under which the partnership will operate, and
decide, for example how much capital each partner will contribute and what share of profits
they will be entitled to.
This is done by way of a partnership agreement which usually covers the following areas:

2.1
Area

Consideration

Capital

how much each partner pays in

whether a "Fixed Capital" level is specified

allocation of profit

more to senior partners?

equal shares?

guaranteed minimum profit share?

whether or not partners are entitled to salaries

it is an appropriation of profit

it is not an income statement expense

whether or not allowed

paid on capital injected

interest rate

may set a limit

may set an interest charge

Profit sharing ratio


(PSR)

Salaries

Interest on capital

Drawings

19.3

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Accounting for partnerships

3.1

There are two key differences between accounting for a sole trader and a partnership.
These are illustrated below.

3.2

Income statement
Sole trader
Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Less: expenses
Profit for period

Partnership

$
X
(X)
X
(X)
X

$
X
(X)
X
(X)
X

Sales
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Less: expenses
Profit for period

All belongs to
sole trader

Shared between partners


according to the
partnership agreement

Appropriating the profit for the period


3.3

The profit for the period is appropriated (shared out) between the partners according to
their partnership agreement.
Steps
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Allocate the partner salaries


Allocate any interest on capital
Charge any interest on drawings
Allocate remaining profit balance in profit sharing ratio

This is done using an appropriation account.


Salaries
Partner A
Partner B
Interest on capital
Partner A
Partner B
* PSR
Partner A
Partner B

Appropriation account
Profit before appropriation
Interest on drawings
X
Partner A
X
Partner B
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

* PSR is always the last entry, splitting the residual profit after all other allocations

19.4

19: PARTNERSHIPS
3.4

Balance sheet
Sole trader

Partnership
$

Capital
Capital
Profit
Less: drawings

$
Capital accounts
Partner A
Partner B

X
X
(X)
X

Current accounts
Partner A
Partner B

Amount owed back


to the owner by the
business
3.5

X
X
X
X
X
X

Amount owed back to the


partners by the business

Capital accounts
These represent the capital invested in the business by each individual partner. The
balances in these accounts will remain relatively static.
The capital account can be shown as one T account subdivided into columns.
For example, if Partner A contributed $5,000 and Partner B $8,000, the capital account
would show.
Capital account
Ptnr
A
$

Ptnr
B
$
Bal b/d

3.6

Ptnr
A
$
5,000

Ptnr
B
$
8,000

Current accounts
These record each partner's day to day transactions with the business.
The main entries in the current account will be the partners appropriation of profits (salary,
interest on capital and profit share) less drawings they have taken from the business and
any interest charged on those drawings.
Current account

Drawings
Interest on drawings
Bal c/d

Ptnr
A
$
2,900
100

Ptnr
B
$
970
30

4,000
7,000

5,000
6,000

19.5

Bal b/d
Salaries
Interest on capital
Profit share

Ptnr
A
$
1,000
1,500
500
4,000
7,000

Ptnr
B
$
1,500

800
3,700
6,000

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Lecture example 1
(a)

Preparation question

On 1 January 20X4 Tick, Cast and Balance entered into partnership together as chartered
certified accountants. They agreed that Balance would receive a salary of $15,000 p.a., they
would all be allowed interest on capital of 12% p.a. and they would share profits in the ratio:
Tick five tenths, Cast three tenths, Balance two tenths. They paid in the following capital
amounts:
Tick
Cast
Balance

$50,000
$30,000
$20,000

In the year to 31 December 20X4 their profit for the period was $50,000.
During the year they had made drawings in cash as follows:
30.6.20X4 Tick
30.9.20X4 Cast
31.12.20X4 Balance

$6,000
$4,000
$8,800

Required
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Write up their capital accounts in columnar form.


Write up the appropriation account.
Write up their current accounts in columnar form.
Show the partners' balances on the balance sheet.

Solution
(i)
Tick
$

Cast
$

Capital Accounts
Balance
$

19.6

Tick
$

Cast
$

Balance
$

19: PARTNERSHIPS
(ii)
Appropriation account for the year ended 31 December 20X4
$

(iii)
Current accounts
Tick Cast Balance
$
$
$

19.7

Tick
$

Cast
$

Balance
$

19: PARTNERSHIPS
(iv)

Tick, Cast and Balance


Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X4 (extract)
$

Capital accounts
Tick
Cast
Balance
Current accounts
Tick
Cast
Balance

(b)

What would your answer be to (ii) and (iii) if the agreement had also provided for interest to
be charged on drawings at the rate of 10% p.a.?
(ii)
Appropriation account for the year ended 31 December 20X4
$

19.8

19: PARTNERSHIPS
(iii)
Tick
$

Current accounts
Cast
Balance
$
$

19.9

Tick
$

Cast
$

Balance
$

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Guaranteed minimum profit share

4.1

It may be that the partnership agreement specifies that one or more partners must receive a
minimum share of profits.

4.2

If when the appropriation of profits is made this level is exceeded, there is nothing further to
do.

4.3

If, however, there is a shortfall then this will be made up by the remaining partners in their
profit sharing ratio.

4.4

Illustration
A, B and C are in partnership and share profits in the ratio 2:2:1.
The partnership made a profit for the year of $50,000. A and B each receive a salary of
$12,000. Interest due on the partners' capital is $2,000, $1,700 and $1,500 respectively.
No interest is charged on drawings.
C has a guaranteed minimum profit share of $7,000.

Salaries
Interest on capital
Profit share (2:2:1)
Subtotal
Guaranteed minimum profit
share shortfall (2:2)

A
$
12,000
2,000
8,320
22,320

B
$
12,000
1,700
8,320
22,020

C
$

1,500
4,160
5,660

(670)

(670)

1,340

21,650

21,350

7,000

Loans

5.1

Unlike sole traders, a partner can make a loan to the partnership.

Total
$
24,000
5,200
20,800
50,000

50,000

Reasons for making a loan


5.2

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Partnership may be short of funds.


Partner is unwilling to tie cash up for long period.
Partner wants to earn interest.
Partner retires but partnership does not have enough cash to buy out his share.

Accounting treatment
5.3

The loan is shown as a non-current liability on the balance sheet and not in the partner's
capital account.

5.4

The interest incurred on the loan is shown as an expense in the income statement (just
like bank interest). It will need to be deducted from the profit figure before any appropriation
is made if it has not already been accounted for.

19.10

19: PARTNERSHIPS
5.5

If the loan interest has not been paid by the end of the year, the liability will be shown in the
relevant partners current account.
The double entry would be:
Dr
Cr

Loan interest expense (I/S)


Current account (B/S)

Lecture example 2

Exam standard for 2 marks

X, Y and Z are in partnership sharing profits in the ratio 6:3:1.


Y made a loan of $10,000 to the partnership on 1 July 20X7. The loan carries interest at 12% but
this has not yet been accounted for.
X and Z receive salaries of $15,000 and $8,000 respectively and interest due on capital to each
partner is $400.
The profit for the year to 31 December 20X7 was $67,000.
Required
What is the amount of profit appropriated to each partner for the year ended 31 December 20X7?
$
Workings

19.11

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Changes to the partnership agreement

6.1

Profits are always appropriated according to the partnership agreement. Therefore if the
terms of the agreement change during the period this will affect the profit appropriation.

6.2

Always use the old partnership agreement to appropriate the profits for the first part of the
year and the new partnership agreement for the latter part of the year.

6.3

Assume profits accrue evenly unless the question specifies otherwise.

Lecture example 3

Exam standard for 2 marks

Melanie, Sarah and Angela are in partnership, compiling their accounts for the year to
31 December each year. The partnership agreement states the following:
Until 30 June 20X3
Annual salaries

Sarah
Angela

$40,000
$20,000

Profit sharing ratio Melanie: Sarah: Angela is 60:20:20:


From 1 July 20X3
Salaries to be discontinued, profit sharing ratio to be: 50:30:20
The profit for the year ended 31 December 20X3 was $400,000 before charging partners' salaries,
accruing evenly through the year and after charging an expense of $40,000, which it was agreed
related wholly to the first six months of the year.
Required
How should the profit for the year be divided among the partners? Use a separate page for your
workings.
Melanie

Sarah

Angela

182,000

130,000

88,000

200,000

116,000

84,000

198,000

118,000

88,000

180,000

132,000

88,000

19.12

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Changes to the partnership goodwill

7.1

When a partner retires from the partnership or a new partner is admitted to the partnership it
is usual for the partners to value the business.

7.2

It is likely that over time the value of items such as property, plant and equipment will
increase over their net book value.
However, hopefully the business will also have built up a good reputation and a loyal
customer base and the business itself will be worth more than its individual assets.

Section 2.8-2.10

7.3

The worth of a business over and above its individual assets is called goodwill.

7.4

When a partner retires it is important that he is paid a sum that represents not just the
money he invested but also his share of the extra value created in the business, i.e. his
share of goodwill.
Goodwill is therefore added to the partners' accounts according to the existing or old profit
sharing ratio.

7.5

Similarly, when a new partner joins, he will pay in a sum of money (capital). It is important
that the original partners value the partnership so they know its worth and can determine
how much the partner should contribute.

7.6

Goodwill is an extremely subjective figure and so it is not left in the partnership's balance
sheet, but is removed.
This is done using the new profit sharing ratio.

Lecture example 4

Preparation question

Katie, Chantel and Heather are in partnership sharing profits in the ratio 4:3:2.
On 1 September Heather decides to retire and leaves the partnership. At that point the partnership
has goodwill valued at $180,000. Katie and Chantel continue to share profits 4:3.
On 1 December Stacy joins the partnership contributing $200,000. At that time goodwill is valued
at $210,000. The new profit sharing ratio for Katie, Chantel and Stacy is 3:2:2.
Required
Show how the goodwill would be accounted for at each change of the partnership.

19.13

19: PARTNERSHIPS

Solution

Quick Quiz

Goodwill
$

Capital account
$

Summary of Chapter 19

8.1

The purpose of a partnership agreement is to specify how the partnership operates in


terms of the how much capital the partners pay in and whether they are paid interest on
capital; whether they are entitled to a salary; whether interest is charged on drawings
and the profit sharing ratio.

8.2

Partners salaries are not an expense of the business but an appropriation of profit.

8.3

Capital accounts represent the capital paid in by each partner and are generally static.

8.4

Current accounts record the partners day to day transactions with the business.

8.5

Whenever a new partner is admitted or an existing partner retires the partnership will be
valued. The worth of the partnership over and above the balance sheet valued is called
goodwill. This is allocated to the partners according to their profit sharing ratio.

19.14

Chapter 19: Questions

19.15

19: QUESTIONS

Data for Questions 19.1 and 19.2


John, Paul and David have been in a partnership for one year providing advice on landscape gardening. The
partnership agreement provides for the following:

a salary to John of $5,000 per annum.


interest on capital balances @ 10% per annum.
interest on drawings @ 5% per annum.
profit sharing ratio of 2:2:1 respectively.

The capital accounts as at 31 March 20X3 showed the following balances:


John $30,000
Paul $25,000
David $20,000
The partners made the following drawings during the year:
John $6,000 on 30 June 20X2
Paul $2,000 on 31 December 20X2
David $1,500 on 31 March 20X3
On 30 September 20X2 Paul lent the partnership $100,000. Interest (which has not been included in the
accounts) is to be charged at 4% per annum. Loan interest is to be included in the current account. The profit for
the year ended 31 March 20X3 was $40,000.

19.1

What is Johns share of the residual profits? $

(2 marks)

19.2

What will be the balance on Pauls current account at 31 March 20X3? $

(2 marks)

19.3

Which of the following is not true?


A

Partners are jointly and severally liable

Partner salaries are an appropriation of profits

Interest on drawings is an appropriation of profits

19.16

(1 mark)

19: QUESTIONS

19.4

A, B and C
A, B and C are in partnership, agreeing to share profits in the ratio of 4:2:1. They have also agreed to
allow interest on capital at 8% per annum, a salary to C of $5,000 per annum, and to charge interest on
drawings made in advance of the year end at a rate of 10% per annum.
The balance sheet as at 30 June 20X8 disclosed the following:
Capital accounts

A
B
C

$
50,000
30,000
10,000

Current accounts

A
B
C

2,630
521
(418)

Loan account (5% interest)

90,000

2,733
15,000
107,733

Drawings were: A $6,400, B $3,100, C $2,000, with all sums being withdrawn on 1 July 20X8.
Profit for the year to 30 June 20X9 was $24,750, before charging interest on A's loan. The partnership
made a payment to A for loan interest on 29 June 20X9 but has not recorded this in its books.
Required
Prepare the current accounts and the appropriation account for the partners as at 30 June 20X9.

19.17

19: QUESTIONS

19.18

Chapter 19: Answers

19.19

19: ANSWERS

19.1 $10,300
$
40,000

Profit per accounts


Less loan interest
4% $100,000

6
12

(2,000)
38,000
John
$
5,000
3,000
(225)
10,300
18,075

Salary
Interest on capital
Interest on drawings
PSR (2:2:1)
Total profit

Paul
$

2,500
(25)
10,300
12,775

David
$

2,000

5,150
7,150

Total
$
5,000
7,500
(250)
25,750 ()
38,000

19.2 $12,775
Current account Paul
Drawings
Interest on drawings
c/d

19.3

2,000
25
12,775
14,800

Interest on capital
Loan interest
PSR

2,500
2,000
10,300
14,800
12,775

b/d

Interest on drawings increases available profits to share and is therefore not an appropriation of
profit.
Partner salaries are an appropriation of profit, not an expense.

19.4

A, B and C
A
$

B
$

Balance b/d
Drawings
6,400
Interest on drawings 640
Balance c/d
6,990
14,030

3,100
310
3,211
6,621

Current accounts
C
$
418
2,000
200
5,032
7,650

19.20

Balance b/d
Salary
Interest on capital
Share of profit
Balance b/d

A
$

B
$

2,630

521

4,000
7,400
14,030
6,990

2,400
3,700
6,621
3,211

C
$
5,000
800
1,850
7,650
5,032

19: ANSWERS

Appropriation account
Salary
Interest
on capital

C
A
B
C

Share of profits in PSR


A(4/7)
B(2/7)
C(1/7)

(W1)

4,000
2,400
800

7,400
3,700
1,850

Profit
Interest on loan

$
5,000

7,200

12,950
25,150
24,750
(750)
24,000

19.21

Profit (W1)
Interest
on drawings

A
B
C

640
310
200

$
24,000

1,150

25,150

19: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

19.22

Introduction to
company accounting

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understand the capital structure of a limited liability company including ordinary shares, preference shares and
loan notes.

Record movements in the share capital and share premium accounts.

Define a bonus issue and a rights issue, their advantages and disadvantages and show how they are recorded in
the balance sheet.

Identify and record the other reserves which may appear in the company balance sheet.

Record dividends in ledger accounts and the financial statements.

Calculate and record finance costs in ledger accounts and the financial statements.

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter are likely to focus on the calculation of share capital movements (new issues, bonus issues
and rights issues), dividends and finance costs and their associated journal entries. You may also see a question
comparing a sole trader and a limited company as was included in the Pilot Paper.

Qualification Context
The knowledge covered in this chapter is developed further in the Fundamentals level paper Financial Reporting (F7).
This paper looks in more detail at whether shares and borrowings should be classified as debt or equity and also at how
they should be valued. The area of income taxes is also extended to include adjustments for deferred tax as well as
current tax.

Business Context
When a company is seeking to raise finance it will evaluate its current financing structure and gearing levels before
deciding how to secure additional funds. It will also consider the degree of risk attached to each method of financing and
will weigh up the cost in terms of interest payments versus future dividends. A company will also receive tax relief on its
interest payments (but not on dividends) and so the tax implications will form part of the final decision.

20.1

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Overview
Finance costs

Reserves

Long term borrowings

Income taxes

Introduction to
company accounting

Shares

Accounting treatment

Issue at a premium

Bonus issue

Dividends

20.2

Rights issue

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Introduction

1.1

We have seen how financial statements are produced for sole traders and partnerships.
These accounts are not subject to any specific regulation and so there is some flexibility as
to how they are presented.

1.2

Companies use exactly the same bookkeeping process as sole traders and partnerships;
however, the financial statements they produce are subject to regulation and must follow a
prescribed format.
Many of the differences are due to the terminology used by company financial statements.

Proforma financial statements

2.1

Income statement for the year ended 31 March 20X7


$'000
X
(X)
X
X
(X)
(X)
(X)
X
(X)
X
X
(X)
X

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Other income
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
Other expenses
Finance costs
Investment income
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period

20.3

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING


2.2

Balance sheet as at 31 March 20X7

$'000

ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Other intangible assets

X
X
X

Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Other current assets
Cash and cash equivalents

X
X
X
X
X
X

Total assets
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Share capital
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings

X
X
X
X
X

Non-current liabilities
Long term borrowings
Long term provisions

X
X
X

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Short term borrowings
Current tax payable
Short term provisions
Total equity and liabilities

X
X
X
X
X

2.3

These proformas will be covered in more detail in Chapter 21.

Share capital

Share capital
3.1
Section 2.3

It is necessary to be able to distinguish between the following types of share capital:


(a)

Authorised share capital

maximum number of shares the company may issue.

(b)

Issued share capital

number of shares actually issued to shareholders.

(c)

Called up share capital

the amount of issued share capital the company has


asked shareholders to pay for to date.

(d)

Paid up share capital

amount of called up share capital which has been paid


for.

20.4

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Types of shares
3.2
Ordinary share

Preference share

Equity share

Fixed rate of dividends (eg 7%


preference share)

Ordinary shareholders own business

Receive dividend in priority to ordinary


shareholders

Usually have voting rights

On winding up, receive capital in priority

No right to a dividend, receive what


directors decide to pay

Share capital: accounting treatment

Issue of new shares


4.1

Rab Co started business on 1 January 20X6 issuing 100,000 ordinary shares of 50c each
for 50c per share. The initial balance sheet would be:
Cash

$
50,000

Share capital 50c ordinary shares

50,000

Issue of new shares at a premium


4.2

Where shares are issued for more than their nominal value, the excess must be credited to
a share premium account.

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

On 1 June 20X6 Rab Co issued a further 200,000 ordinary shares of 50c each for 80c per share.
Required
Show how this issue of shares would be accounted for and what the balance sheet would look like
immediately after the issue.

20.5

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Solution
Dr
$

Cr
$

Dr Cash
Cr Share capital
Cr Share premium account
Rab Co balance sheet (extract) as at 1 June 20X6
Equity
$
Share capital 50c ordinary shares
Share premium account

Bonus issue (capitalisation issue)


4.3

This is used when a company wishes to increase its share capital without needing to raise
additional finance by issuing new shares. Any reserve may be used including the share
premium account.

4.4
Advantages

4.5

Disadvantage

Bonus issue can be made from the share


premium account which has few other
uses

Will allow the share price to fall (without


disadvantaging shareholder wealth) to
make the company's shares more
affordable to new investors

Shareholders will now own more shares


and could sell part of their holding

A bonus issue is always done at nominal value.

20.6

The rationale for a bonus issue is not


always understood by shareholders

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

Rab Co
Balance sheet (extract)
$
150,000
60,000
200,000
410,000

Share capital 50c ordinary shares


Share premium account
Retained earnings
Several years later Rab Co is to make a bonus issue on a 1 for 4 basis.
Required

Show how this issue of shares would be accounted for and prepare the balance sheet of Rab Co
immediately after the issue.

Solution
Dr
$

Cr
$

Dr Share premium account


Cr Share capital
Rab Co
Balance Sheet (extract)
$
Share capital 50c ordinary shares
Share premium account
Retained earnings

Rights issue
4.6

(a)

A rights issue is an issue of shares for cash (unlike a bonus issue) to existing
shareholders.

(b)

Rights are offered to the existing shareholders who can sell them if they wish.

20.7

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING


4.7
Advantages

Disadvantages

More cost effective way for the


company to raise finance than a
fresh issue to the public

Lack of shareholder interest may reflect


badly on the company

A more time efficient way to issue


shares

Unwelcome predators may try to acquire


shares where not all rights are taken up

If all rights are taken up


shareholders will maintain their
existing percentage shareholding

Effect on future dividend policy as company


will have issued more shares under the
rights issue than it would have under a fresh
issue to the public

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

One year later, Rab Co is to make a rights issue on a 1 for 5 basis. The rights price is $1.50. All
shareholders take up their rights.
The following balance sheet extract shows the position before the issue
Rab Co
Balance sheet (extract)
$
187,500
22,500
230,000
440,000

Share capital 50c ordinary shares


Share premium account
Retained earnings
Required

Show how this issue of shares would be accounted for and prepare the balance sheet of Rab Co
immediately following the issue.

Solution
Dr
$

Cr
$

Dr Cash
Cr Share capital
Cr Share premium account
Rab Co
Balance sheet (extract)

Share capital 50c ordinary shares


Share premium account
Retained earnings

20.8

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Reserves

5.1

The following reserves are commonly found in limited liability company accounts.
(a)

The share premium account:


(i)

Typical permitted uses:


(1)
(2)

to issue bonus shares;


to write off share issue expenses.

(b)

The revaluation reserve (see Chapter 9):

(c)

Other reserves:
as designated by the individual company, for example a 'general reserve'.

(d)

Retained earnings:
cumulative undistributed profits less any losses.

Dividends

Definition
6.1

Dividends a sharing out/appropriation of retained earnings to owners/shareholders.

Illustration
6.2

Suppose a company with 1,000 ordinary $1 shares in issue made a profit of $500 in its first
year. The company has two choices as to what can be done with this profit:
(a)
(b)

distribute it as a dividend to the shareholders;


retain it in the business.

If this company decides to pay a dividend of 10c per share and retain the remaining profits,
the financial statements would appear as follows:
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7
Profit for the period

$
500

Balance Sheet as at 31 December 20X7 (extract)


$
1,000
400
1,400

Share capital $1 shares


Retained earnings (500 100)
6.3

Dividends are charged directly to retained earnings as they are an appropriation of profits
earned to date. They are not an expense of the income statement.

6.4

The double entry is:


Dr
Cr

Retained earnings
Dividends payable (B/S)
20.9

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING


6.5

A company may pay dividends in two stages:


(a)
(b)

Interim
Final

(mid year)
(end year)

In reality the directors will wait until they know the company's full year profit before declaring
the final dividend.
The final dividend will only be accounted for in the current year if it is declared before the
year end. Otherwise it will be disclosed in a note to the financial statements (see Chapter
22).

Lecture example 4

Preparation question

ABC Co has the following share capital:


100,000
200,000

6% $1 preference shares
50c ordinary shares

Retained earnings at the beginning of the year were $125,000.


During the year ended 31 December 20X7 it made the following profit:
$
60,000
10,000
50,000

Profit before tax


Income tax expense
Profit for the period
Dividends paid and declared during the year were as follows:
Interim dividend paid
5c per share
Final dividend declared on 20 January 20X8 10c per share
Required

Show the movement in retained earnings for ABC Co for the year ended 31 December 20X7.

Solution
$
Retained earnings at beginning of year
Profit for the period
Dividends

Preference
Ordinary

Retained earnings at end of year

20.10

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Long term borrowings

7.1

A company may choose to raise finance by issuing shares (equity).


Alternatively it can raise funds by issuing debt.

7.2

One way of raising long term finance is for a company to issue loan notes (also called loan
stock or debentures).
These loans usually carry a fixed rate of interest and have a pre-determined redemption
date, for example, $50,000 10% debentures 2012. This means the company will pay interest
at 10% on the $50,000 borrowed each year. The capital amount of $50,000 will be repaid in
2012.

Finance costs

8.1

The interest expense incurred on long term borrowings will be shown as an expense called
'finance costs' in the income statement.

8.2

It will be accounted for as follows:


Dr
Cr

Finance costs (I/S)


Bank

Income taxes

9.1

Companies must pay income tax on their profits. This tax is payable after the end of the
financial year and so the financial statements will include an accrual for the directors' best
estimate of the tax due on the profit for the period.

9.2

The tax is shown as an expense in the income statement and a current liability in the
balance sheet and will be accounted for as follows:
Dr
Cr

9.3

Income tax expense (I/S)


Current tax payable (B/S)

Often the actual amount of tax paid will be different from the amount that was recorded in
the financial statements.
This over or under provision is simply adjusted in the next financial statements.

20.11

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

Lecture example 5

Preparation question

Lauren Ltd has a year end of December.


When preparing its financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X5, Lauren Ltd
estimated that its income tax payable would be $62,000.
Lauren Ltd settled this tax liability on 30 September 20X6, paying $65,000. The tax estimate for the
year ended 31 December 20X6 is $43,000.
Required
(1)

Record the tax entries for the years ended 31 December 20X5 and 20X6 in the ledger
accounts.

(2)

Prepare the tax note which relates to the income statement for the year ended 31 December
20X6.

Solution
(1)

Income tax expense (I/S)


$

Current tax payable (B/S)


$

(2)

Tax note for the year ended 31 December 20X6

20.12

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

10 Comparison
The following table shows a comparison between a sole trader and a limited liability
company.
Sole trader

Company

Ownership

The proprietor owns the business.

There are often a large number of


owners, who are called
shareholders or members.

Liability

The proprietor has unlimited legal


liability regarding the business.

Members/shareholders have
limited liability. This means that
they are only liable to the extent of
their investment in the business.

Legal status

The business and the proprietor


share legal identity (although the
business is a separate business
entity for reporting purposes).

A company is a separate legal


entity.

Management

The proprietor usually owns and


manages the business.

Members/shareholders do not
usually manage the business, but
appoint a Board of Directors to run
the company on their behalf.

Profits

The proprietor takes 'drawings' out


of the business.

Members/shareholders receive
profits in the form of dividends.
The remainder of the profits are
retained in the company. The
directors receive a salary from the
company and this is an expense in
the income statement.

Any cash amounts taken as a


salary are not an expense of the
business but drawings.

Taxation

Business profits are taxed in the


hands of the proprietor, using
individual's tax rates.

Income tax is paid on the


company profits.

Balance sheet

The middle of the balance sheet is


split into 'opening capital', 'profits'
and 'drawings'.

The middle of the balance sheet is


split into 'share capital' and
'reserves'.

Legal
requirements

There are no legal requirements


specific to a sole trader.

There are extensive legal


requirements governing limited
companies.

Other

The business is closed to outside


investors.

Investors can invest in a company.

20.13

20: INTRODUCTION TO COMPANY ACCOUNTING

11 Summary of Chapter 20
Quick Quiz

11.1 In a limited liability company the shareholders own the business. A company may raise
finance by issuing new share capital. Where shares are issued at a premium to their
nominal value, the premium is recorded in the share premium account.
11.2 A bonus issue is where the company issues shares for no cash consideration. With a
rights issue, shares are issued for cash but the price charged is slightly lower than the
current market price.
11.3 Shareholders may receive a dividend as a return on their investment; these are accounted
for as a deduction to retained earnings.
11.4 A company may also raise finance by issuing debt such as loan notes or debentures. It will
have to pay interest on these and this will be shown as 'finance costs' in the income
statement.
11.5 Companies pay income tax on their profits.

12 Double Entry Summary for Chapter 20


12.1 Adjustment to record dividends:
Dr
Cr

Retained earnings (B/S)


Dividends payable (B/S)

12.2 Adjustment to record finance costs:


Dr
Cr

Finance costs (I/S)


Bank (B/S)

12.3 Adjustment to record the income tax expense:


Dr
Cr

Income tax expense (I/S)


Current tax payable (B/S)

20.14

Chapter 20: Questions

20.15

20: QUESTIONS

20.1

A company has an authorised share capital of 1,000,000 50c ordinary shares and an issued share capital
of 800,000 50c ordinary shares.
If an ordinary dividend of 5% is declared what is the amount payable to shareholders? $
(1 mark)

20.2

20.3

If a shareholder in a limited liability company sells his shares to another private investor, for less than he
paid for them, the share capital of the company will
A

Remain unchanged

Increase by the nominal value of the shares

Increase by the amount received for the shares

Decrease by the nominal value of the shares

(2 marks)

A companys issued share capital consists of $100,000 in 6% $1 preference shares and $50,000 in 50c
ordinary shares. The directors wish to pay an ordinary dividend for the year of 5 cents per share. What is
the companys total dividend for the year?
A

$8,500

$11,000

$5,000

$17,000

(2 marks)

20.16

Chapter 20: Answers

20.17

20: ANSWERS

20.1

$20,000
5% (800,000 0.50)

20.2

20.3

($100,000 6%) + ($50,000 2 5c)

END OF CHAPTER

20.18

Preparation of
financial statements for
companies

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Recognise how the balance sheet equation and business entity convention underlie the balance sheet.

Understand the nature of reserves and report them in a company balance sheet.

Prepare extracts of a balance sheet from given information.

Understand why the heading 'retained earnings' appears in a company balance sheet.

Prepare extracts of an income statement from given information.

Understand how accounting concepts apply to revenue and expenses.

Calculate revenue, cost of sales, gross profit and net profit from given information and disclose items of income
and expenditure in the income statement.

Record income taxes in the income statement of a company.

Understand the inter-relationship between the balance sheet and income statement.

Identify items requiring separate disclosure on the face of the income statement.

Identify the components of the statement of changes in equity.

Exam Context
Whilst you will not be required to produce an entire income statement, balance sheet or statement of changes in equity
you may be asked to calculate individual elements of each statement. A question on the Pilot Paper required you to
demonstrate understanding of what was included in the statement of changes in equity.

Qualification Context
The topics covered in this chapter are developed further in the Fundamentals level paper Financial Reporting (F7). Here
you will need to produce financial statements using the format specified by IAS 1. You will also learn how accounting
standards such as IFRS 5 affect the presentation of the financial statements if, for example, a company discontinues
part of its operations.

Business Context
Financial statements are used by a wide range of user groups to make decisions, for example whether or not to buy
shares in a company. Financial statements need to be prepared in a consistent way in order for users to be able to
compare different companies. The notes to the accounts will also provide a lot more detail on the headline figures shown
in the income statement and balance sheet.

21.1

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Overview
Income statement

Balance sheet

Preparation of financial statements


for companies

Notes to the accounts

Statement of
changes in equity

21.2

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Introduction

1.1

As stated in Chapter 20 the financial statements of a limited liability company are subject to
regulation and must follow a prescribed format.

1.2

Much of the prescribed format is determined by IAS 1. This accounting standard states what
should be included in a set of financial statements and how they should be presented.
A complete set of financial statements in accordance with IAS 1 comprises:
(a)

a balance sheet

(b)

an income statement

(c)

a statement showing either:


(i)

all changes in equity; or

(ii)

changes in equity other than those arising from transactions with equity holders
acting in their capacity as equity holders;

(d)

a cash flow statement; and

(e)

notes, comprising a summary of significant accounting policies and other explanatory


notes.

Proforma financial statements

2.1

Income statement for the year ended 31 March 20X7


$'000
X
(X)
X
X
(X)
(X)
(X)
X
(X)
X
X
(X)
X

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Other income
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
Other expenses
Finance costs
Investment income
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period

21.3

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES


2.2

Balance sheet as at 31 March 20X7


$'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Other intangible assets

X
X
X

Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Other current assets
Cash and cash equivalents

X
X
X
X
X
X

Total assets
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Share capital
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings

X
X
X
X
X

Non-current liabilities
Long term borrowings
Long term provisions

X
X

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Short term borrowings
Current tax payable
Short term provisions
Total equity and liabilities

X
X
X
X
X

21.4

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Lecture example 1

Technique demonstration

The following balances have been extracted from the trial balance of Arrow, a limited liability
company, at 30 September 20X6.
$'000
12,740
1,500
200
1,000
45
835
7,200
800
1,800
4,400
1,200
50
2,060
450
550
500
1,250

Sales
Share capital 50c ordinary shares
Share premium account
Trade receivables
Bad debts written off
Bank balance
Purchases
Revaluation reserve
Office expenses
Property, plant and equipment
6% loan notes 20X9
Short term warranty provisions
Vehicle distribution costs
Inventories at 1 October 20X5
Trade payables
Administrative staff salaries
Retained earnings
The following information still needs to be accounted for:
(1)

During the year the company made a rights issue on a 1 for 6 basis. The issue was fully
subscribed and the rights price was $1.27.

(2)

No account has been taken of the interest on the loan notes.

(3)

The estimate for tax payable on this year's profit is $270,000.

(4)

Inventories held at the year end amounted to $610,000.

(5)

The warranty provision needs to be increased to $80,000.

(6)

The property, plant and equipment was valued at $5m and this amount needs to be
incorporated in the financial statements.

(7)

A dividend of $300,000 was paid in the year but this has not been accounted for.

Required
Prepare the income statement of Arrow for the year ended 30 September 20X6 and a balance
sheet as at that date.

21.5

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Solution
Arrow
Income statement for the year ended 30 September 20X6
$'000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
Finance costs
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period
Arrow
Balance sheet as at 30 September 20X6
$'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Total assets
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
EQUITY
Share capital
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings
Non-current liabilities
Long term borrowings
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Other payables
Current tax payable
Short term provisions
Total equity and liabilities

21.6

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

21.7

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES


2.3

Statement of changes in equity for the year ended 31 March 20X7


Share
Share
Revalcapital premium
uation
account reserve
$'000
$'000
$'000
Balance at 31 March 20X6
Changes in accounting policies
Restated balance

2.4

Gain on revaluation of properties


Tax on items taken directly to equity
Net income recognised directly in
equity
Profit for the period
Total recognised income and
expense for the period

Dividends
Issue of share capital
Balance at 31 March 20X7

X
X

X
X

Retained Total
earnings equity
$'000

$'000

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X
X

(X)

(X)
X
X

As an alternative the statement of changes in equity may be presented as a note to the


financial statements. In this case it is replaced by the statement of recognised gains and
losses as a primary statement.
Statement of recognised gains and losses for the year ended 31 March 20X7
Gain on revaluation of properties
Tax on items taken directly to equity
Net income recognised directly in equity
Profit for the period
Total recognised income and expense for the period

21.8

$'000
X
(X)
X
X
X

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Lecture example 2

Technique demonstration

From the trial balance in Lecture example 1, Arrow had the following equity balances at 1 October
20X5:
$'000
1,500
200
800
1,250
3,750

Share capital 50c ordinary shares


Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings
Required

Using the information from Lecture example 1, produce a statement of changes in equity for Arrow
for the year ended 30 September 20X6.

Solution
Share
capital
$'000
Balance at 30 September 20X5
Gain on revaluation of property, plant and
equipment
Net income recognised directly in equity
Profit for the period
Total recognised income and expense
for the period
Dividends
Issue of share capital
Balance at 30 September 20X6

21.9

Share
premium
account
$'000

Revaluation
reserve
$'000

Retained
earnings

Total
equity

$'000

$'000

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

Notes to the accounts


Notes are included in a set of financial statements to give users extra information. You
should be aware of the following notes:

3.1

Property, plant and equipment (Chapter 9)


Land and
buildings
$
X
X
X
(X)
(X)
X

Machinery

At 31 March 20X7
Cost or valuation
Accumulated depreciation
Net book value
At 31 March 20X6
Cost or valuation
Accumulated depreciation
Net book value

Net book value at 1 April 20X6


Additions
Revaluation surplus
Depreciation charge
Disposals
Net book value at 31 March 20X7

3.2

Total

$
X
X

(X)
(X)
X

Office
equipment
$
X
X

(X)
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

X
(X)
X

$
X
X
X
(X)
(X)
X

Intangible non-current assets (Chapter 10)


Development
expenditure
$
X
X
(X)
(X)
X

Net book value at 1 April 20X6


Additions
Amortisation charge
Disposals
Net book value at 31 March 20X7
At 31 March 20X7
Cost
Accumulated amortisation
Net book value

X
(X)
X

At 31 March 20X6
Cost
Accumulated amortisation
Net book value

X
(X)
X

21.10

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES


3.3

Provisions (Chapter 13)


$
X
X
(X)
X

At 1 April 20X6
Increase in period
Released in period
At 31 March 20X7
3.4

Contingent liabilities (Chapter 13)


Unless remote, disclose for each contingent liability:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

3.5

a brief description of its nature; and where practicable


an estimate of the financial effect
an indication of the uncertainties relating to the amount or timing of any outflow; and
the possibility of any reimbursement

Contingent assets (Chapter 13)


Where an inflow of economic benefits is probable, an entity should disclose
(a)
(b)

3.6

a brief description of its nature; and where practicable


an estimate of the financial effect

Events after the balance sheet date (Chapter 22)


In respect of non-adjusting events after the balance sheet date disclose
(a)
(b)

the nature of the event


an estimate of its financial effect (or a statement that an estimate cannot be made).

Summary of Chapter 21

4.1

The financial statements produced by a company need to follow the format prescribed by
IAS 1.

4.2

The statement of changes in equity shows the movements on each of the accounts in the
equity section of the balance sheet in a separate statement.

21.11

21: PREPARATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS FOR COMPANIES

21.12

Chapter 21: Questions

21.13

21: QUESTIONS

21.1

21.2

Which of the following items impact on the Statement of Changes in Equity?


(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

Issue of ordinary shares


Revaluation of a building
Profit for the period
Revaluation of a non-current asset investment

(i)

(i), (iii)

(ii), (iii)

All of the above

(2 marks)

Spend Co
The following balances remain in the books of Spend Co at 30 June 20X8 after the preparation of the
trading account.
$
Share capital
80,000 $1 ordinary shares
80,000
40,000 8% $1 preference shares
40,000
Share premium account
10,000
Revaluation reserve
30,000
Inventories at 30 June 20X8
83,852
Trade receivables and prepayments
27,200
Trade payables and accruals
13,722
Bank balance
7,796
10% debentures
16,000
General reserve
28,000
Irrecoverable debts
340
Gross profit for the period
81,508
Wages and salaries
28,200
Insurance
1,410
Postage and telephone
620
Light and heat
1,216
Debenture interest ( year to 31 December 20X7)
800
Directors fees
2,500
General expenses
3,108
Vehicles (cost $19,400)
6,800
Office furniture and equipment (cost $44,640)
27,440
Land and buildings at valuation
132,200
Retained earnings at 1 July 20X7
24,252
The following information is also available:
(1)

The land and buildings are to be revalued at $150,000;

(2)

Office furniture and equipment is to be depreciated at 15% on cost, and vehicles at 20% on cost;

(3)

A bill for $348 in respect of electricity consumed up to 30 June 20X8 has not been entered in the
ledger;

(4)

The amount for insurance includes a premium of $300 paid in December 20X7 to cover the
company against fire loss for the year 1 January 20X8 to 31 December 20X8;

21.14

21: QUESTIONS

(5)

Provisions are to be made for:


$
5,000
1,200

Directors fees
Audit fee
The outstanding debenture interest.
(6)

The directors made the following recommendations prior to the year end which have not yet been
adjusted for:
(i)
(ii)

$12,000 should be transferred to a general reserve;


the preference dividend be should accrued for payment;

Required
Prepare the income statement from the gross profit line downwards for the period ended 30 June 20X8
and a balance sheet as at that date (ignore income tax).

21.15

21: QUESTIONS

21.16

Chapter 21: Answers

21.17

21: ANSWERS

21.1

21.2

Spend Co
Spend Co
Income statement for the period ended 30 June 20X8
$
Gross profit for the period
Less expenses:
Irrecoverable debts
Wages and salaries
Insurance (1,410 (300 x 6/12))
Postage and telephone
Light and heat (1,216 + 384)
Debenture interest (800 + 800)
Directors fees (2,500 + 5,000)
Audit fee
General expenses
Depreciation:
Office furniture and equipment
Vehicles

$
81,508

340
28,200
1,260
620
1,564
1,600
7,500
1,200
3,108
6,696
3,880
55,968
25,540

Profit for the period


Spend Co
Balance sheet as at 30 June 20X8

NON-CURRENT ASSETS
Land and buildings
Furniture and equipment
Motor vehicles

Cost or
Valuation
$

Acc.
Dep'n
$

NBV

150,000
44,640
19,400
214,040

23,896
16,480
40,376

150,000
20,744
2,920
173,664

CURRENT ASSETS
Inventories
Trade receivables and prepayments (27,200 + (300 6/12))
Cash and cash equivalents

EQUITY
Share capital
80,000 $1 ordinary shares
40,000 8% $1 preference shares
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve (30,000 + 17,800)
General reserve (28,000 + 12,000)
Retained earnings (Working)

83,852
27,350
7,796
118,998
292,662

80,000
40,000
10,000
47,800
40,000
34,592
252,392

NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES
10% debentures

16,000

CURRENT LIABILITIES
Trade payables and accruals (13,722 + 5,000 + 1,200 + 800 + 348)
Dividends payable

21.18

21,070
3,200
24,270
292,662

21: ANSWERS

Working
Retained earnings
Retained earnings at 1 July 20X7
Profit for the period
Dividends declared
8% preference dividend
Transfer to general reserve
Retained earnings at 30 June 20X8

$
24,252
25,540
(3,200)
(12,000)
34,592

21.19

21: ANSWERS

END OF CHAPTER

21.20

Events after the


balance sheet date

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Define an event after the balance sheet date in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards.

Classify events as adjusting or non-adjusting.

Distinguish between how adjusting and non-adjusting events are reported in the financial statements.

Exam Context
Questions on this topic are likely to require you to identify adjusting and non-adjusting events from a list of options and
the appropriate accounting treatment of each event. Both these types of questions were tested in the Pilot Paper.

Qualification Context
The knowledge in this chapter is tested again at the Professional level paper, Corporate Reporting (P2) where you will
be expected to consider how events after the balance sheet date may impact the way in which transactions are reported.

22.1

22: EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

Overview

Definition

Events after the


balance sheet date

Adjusting events

Non-adjusting events

22.2

22: EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

Definition

1.1

Events after the balance sheet date: events, both favourable and unfavourable, that occur
between the balance sheet date and the date when the financial statements are authorised
for issue.

1.2

There are two types of event after the balance sheet date.

Adjusting and non-adjusting events

2.1
Adjusting events

Non-adjusting events

Events which provide evidence of


conditions which existed at the balance
sheet date.

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

Examples:
resolution of a court case
bankruptcy of a major customer
evidence of NRV of inventories
discovery of fraud or errors that show
the financial statements were incorrect

Examples:
(1) destruction of major asset, eg by
flood or fire
(2) major share transactions
(3) announcement of a plan to close part
of a business

Accounting treatment:

Change the amounts in the financial


statements
2.2

Events that relate to conditions which


arose after the balance sheet date

Accounting treatment:

Disclose non-adjusting event in a note to


the financial statements

(a)

Dividends proposed or declared after the balance sheet date but before the financial
statements are approved should be disclosed in a note to the financial statements.

(b)

A non-adjusting event that affects going concern becomes an adjusting event.

22.3

22: EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

Lecture example 1

Exam standard for 2 marks

Which of the following events after the balance sheet date would normally qualify as a nonadjusting event?
1

A fall in the market price of shares held by the entity as investments.

Insolvency of a trade receivable with a balance of $200,000 outstanding at the balance


sheet date.

Declaration of the year-end dividend by the directors.

Confirmation of the amount of damages awarded to an employee who sued for unfair
dismissal after being sacked two months before the year end.

A
B
C
D

2 only
1 and 3
1, 3 and 4
2 and 4

Solution

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 22

3.1

Events after the balance sheet date are events which occur between the balance sheet date
and the date the financial statements are approved for issue.

3.2

There are two types: adjusting and non-adjusting.

3.3

Adjusting events provide evidence of conditions that existed at the balance sheet date.
The financial statements should be changed to include this information.

3.4

Non-adjusting events relate to conditions which arose after the balance sheet date.
These should be disclosed as a note to the financial statements.

22.4

Chapter 22: Questions

22.5

22: QUESTIONS

22.1

The following are examples of events which might occur between the balance sheet date and the date on
which the financial statements are authorised for issue:
(1)
(2)
(3)

Losses on inventories as a result of a catastrophe such as a fire or flood after the year end
The discovery of fraud which shows that the financial statements were incorrect
Revaluations of property which provide evidence of an impairment in value

Which of the examples given should normally be classified as an adjusting event?

22.2

(1), (2) and (3)

(1) and (2)

(1) and (3)

(2) and (3)

(2 marks)

Robin Co has a year end of 31 December 20X8, the directors were informed on 27 February 20X9 that a
serious fire at one of the company's factories would stop production there for at least six months to come.
On 3 March 20X9 the directors of Robin Co were informed that a major customer had gone into
liquidation. The liquidator was pessimistic about the prospect of recovering anything for unsecured
creditors. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X8 were approved on 20 March
20X9.
In accordance with IAS 10, Events after the balance sheet date, how should the two events be treated in
the financial statements?
Fire

22.3

Liquidation

Accounts adjusted

Disclosed in notes

Disclosed in notes

Disclosed in notes

Accounts adjusted

Accounts adjusted

Disclosed in notes

Accounts adjusted

(2 marks)

A Co has a year end of 31 December 20X7. During the preparation of the financial statements in March
20X8 the following issues arose:
(1)

Sales of a particular inventory line were poor during the second half of 20X7. The directors had
hoped that sales would pick up in 20X8 but it is now apparent that the inventory will need to be
marked down below their original cost in order to sell them.

(2)

On 12 February 20X8 one of the company's production plants was struck by lightening. The
company will suffer a net loss of $55,000 as a result of this.

(3)

Sporran Co is a valued customer which owed A Co $34,000 at the balance sheet date, although
they were behind with their payments. Since the year end sales to Sporran Co were $12,000. The
directors have just received notification that Sporran Co has gone into liquidation.

How should the above events be classified according to IAS 10 Events after the balance sheet date?
Adjusting
event

Non-adjusting
event

2,3

1, 2

1,3

1, 2, 3

(2 marks)

22.6

Chapter 22: Answers

22.7

22: ANSWERS

22.1 D

22.2

(1)

After the balance sheet date and therefore non-adjusting.

(2)

The financial statements are incorrect, therefore clearly we must adjust.

(3)

The impairment is assumed to have taken place by the balance sheet date. We simply did
not find out until later.

The fire is a non-adjusting event as it does not affect the value of the building at 31 December
20X8. It is therefore only disclosed in a note to the financial statements unless it threatens the
company's going concern in which case it would become an adjusting event.
The customer is assumed to be insolvent at 31 December 20X8. We simply did not know this and
therefore it is an adjusting event and it should be adjusted for.

22.3

END OF CHAPTER

22.8

Cash flow statements

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Differentiate between profit and cash flows and understand the need for management to control cash flow.

Recognise the benefits and drawbacks to users of the financial statements of a cash flow statement.

Classify the effect of transactions on cash flows and how they should be treated in a company's cash flow
statement.

Calculate the figures needed for the cash flow statement including cash flows from operating, investing and
financing activities.

Calculate the cash flow from operating activities using the direct and indirect method.

Prepare extracts from cash flow statements from given information.

Exam Context
Questions on this chapter are likely to focus on whether you can identify which items should and should not go into the
cash flow statement and also on performing basic calculations. For example, you may be asked to calculate figures such
as the cash generated from operations from given information or the cash paid to acquire property, plant and equipment.

Qualification Context
The knowledge covered in this chapter is developed in the Fundamentals level paper Financial Reporting (F7) where
you will have to produce a cash flow statement in full. This is likely to involve more complex areas such as cash flows
related to non-current assets held on finance leases. You will also need to be able to interpret a cash flow. Group cash
flows are examined in the Professional level paper Corporate Reporting (P2).

Business Context
The ability to generate cash is key to the survival of an entity. Whilst directors may use cash budgets to estimate future
cash flows, the cash flow statement shows an historic record of how cash has been generated and where it was spent.
Cash is not subject to manipulation through an entity's choice of accounting policies. It is therefore a reliable measure of
performance that is relevant to users of the financial statements.

23.1

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Overview

Cash

Cash equivalents

Cash flows

Cash flow
statements

IAS 7

Cash flows from


operating activities

Indirect method

Cash flows from


investing activities

Direct method

23.2

Cash flows from


financing activities

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Purpose

1.1

To show the effect of a companys commercial transactions on its cash balance.


It is thought that users of accounts can readily understand cash flows, as opposed to
income statements and balance sheets which are subject to manipulation by the use of
different accounting policies.
Cash flows are used as an investment appraisal method such as net present value and
hence a cash flow statement gives potential investors a method with which to evaluate a
business.

IAS 7: Cash flow statements

2.1

IAS 7 splits cash flows into the following headings:

Cash flows from operating activities


Cash flows from investing activities
Cash flows from financing activities

Definitions
2.2

(a)

Cash

(b)

Cash equivalents

cash on hand

demand deposits

short term, highly liquid


investments
readily convertible to
known amounts of cash
insignificant risk of
changes in value

eg current asset
investments (shares)
(c)
Cash flows

inflows and outflows of cash and cash equivalents

23.3

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS


2.3

XYZ CO
Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7 (indirect method)
$000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation
Adjustment for:
Depreciation
Investment income
Interest expense
Increase in trade and other receivables
Decrease in inventories
Decrease in trade payables
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid
Income taxes paid

3,390
450
(500)
400
3,740
(500)
1,050
(1,740)
2,550
(270)
(900)

Net cash from operating activities


Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of equipment
Interest received
Dividends received

1,380
(900)
20
200
200

Net cash used in investing activities


Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issue of share capital
Proceeds from long-term borrowings
Dividends paid*

$000

(480)
250
250
(1,290)

Net cash used in financing activities

(790)

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents


Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

110
120
230

* This could also be shown as an operating cash flow.

23.4

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Cash flows from operating activities

3.1

These represent cash flows derived from operating or trading activities.


An entity should report cash flows from operating activities using either:

Section 1.7.1

(a)

The direct method, whereby major classes of gross cash receipts and payments are
disclosed (preferred method per IAS 7 see Section 6.1), or

(b)

The indirect method (as above), whereby reported profit or loss is adjusted for the
effects of transactions of a non cash nature, any accruals or prepayments of
operating expenses, and items relating to investing or financing cash flows.

Income taxes paid


3.2

Income taxes paid may need to be calculated from other data given to you. This is best
achieved by putting the relevant figures into a 'T' account working.

Lecture example 1

Preparation question

In the balance sheets of Tacks Co as at 31 December 20X9 and 31 December 20X8 were the
following amounts for income tax payable.
31 December
20X9
20X8
$
$
156,000
168,000

Income tax payable


The income statement tax charge for 20X9 amounted to $104,000.
Required
What is the amount of income taxes paid during the year?

Workings
Income tax payable
$'000

23.5

$'000

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Section 1.7.2

Cash flows from investing activities

4.1

The cash flows included in this section are those related to the acquisition or disposal of any
non-current assets or investments together with returns received in cash from investments,
i.e. dividends and interest. This section shows the extent to which expenditures have been
made for resources intended to generate future income and cash flows.

Lecture example 2

Preparation question

On 31 December 20X8 the value of plant and equipment in the books of Erosion Co was as
follows:

$
200,000
80,000
120,000

Plant and equipment at cost


Accumulated depreciation
Plant and equipment at net book value

On 1 January 20X9 an item of plant was sold for $8,000 which had originally cost $20,000 when
new, but had a net book value of $11,000 at the time of sale. (The balance sheet values shown
above do not show that this sale has taken place.)
On 31 December 20X9 the value of plant and equipment in the balance sheet was:
Plant and equipment at cost
Accumulated depreciation
Plant and equipment at net book value

$
280,000
111,000
169,000

Required
Show the relevant entries for property, plant and equipment which would appear in a cash flow
statement for Erosion Co in 20X9.

Solution
Workings
Plant & equipment cost
$'000

$'000

Accumulated depreciation
$'000

$'000

23.6

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Cash flows from financing activities

5.1

Financing cash flows comprise receipts from or repayments to external providers of finance
in respect of principal amounts of finance. Examples of financing cash flows are:

Section 1.7.3

Cash proceeds from issuing shares

Cash proceeds from issuing debentures, loans, notes, bonds, mortgages and other
short or long term borrowings

Cash repayments of amounts borrowed

Dividends paid to shareholders

In order to calculate such figures the closing balance sheet figure for debt or share capital
and share premium is compared with the opening position for the same items.

Dividends paid
5.2

The cash outflows included in dividends paid are dividends paid on the reporting company's
equity shares.

Lecture example 3

Preparation question

Distribution Co balance sheet extract for the year ended 31 December 20X9
20X9
$'000
45

Dividends payable

20X8
$'000
35

Dividends charged to retained earnings were $60,000.


Required
What are the dividends paid during the year ended 31 December 20X9?

Workings
Dividends payable
$'000

23.7

$'000

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Lecture example 4

Technique question

The summarised accounts of the Emma Co for the year ended 31 December 20X8 are as follows:
Balance sheets as at 31 December

Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Current assets:
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash

Equity
Share capital ($1 ordinary shares)
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings
Non-current liabilities
10% debentures
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Income tax payable
Dividends payable
Overdraft

20X8
$'000

20X7
$'000

628

514

214
168
7
389
1,017

210
147

357
871

250
70
110
314
744

200
60
100
282
642

80

50

136
39
18

193
1,017

121
28
16
14
179
871

Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X8


Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Other expenses (including depreciation of $42,000)
Finance costs (interest paid)
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period

23.8

$'000
600
319
281
186
8
87
31
56

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS


Retained
earnings
$000
282
56
(24)
314

Statement of changes in equity (extract)


Balance at 31 December 20X7
Profit for the period
Dividends
Balance at 31 December 20X8

You are additionally informed that there have been no disposals of property, plant and equipment
during the year. The new debentures were issued on 1 January 20X8.
Required
Produce a cash flow statement for Emma Co for the year ended 31 December 20X8.

Solution
EMMA CO
Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 20X8

$000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
Interest expense
Increase in trade receivables
Increase in inventories
Increase in trade payables
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid
Income taxes paid
Net cash from operating activities
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Net cash used in investing activities
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from issue of shares
Proceeds from issue of debentures
Dividends paid
Net cash from financing activities
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

23.9

$000

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS


Workings

23.10

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Cash flows from operating activities using the direct


method

6.1

As noted in Section 3.1, IAS 7 has two methods available under which the cash flow
statement can be prepared:

6.2

indirect method (seen previously)


direct method

The only difference is the direct method derives the 'cash generated from operations' figure
in a different way. The operating element of the cash flow statement should be shown as
follows:
$000
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers
Cash payments to suppliers and employees
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid
Income taxes paid
Net cash from operating activities

$000

30,150
(27,600)
2,550
(270)
(900)
1,380

Cash received from customers


6.3

This represents cash flows received during the accounting period in respect of sales.

Cash payments to suppliers and employees


6.4

This represents cash flows made during the accounting period in respect of goods and
services and amounts paid to employees.

23.11

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Lecture example 5

Technique question

Required
Using the information in Lecture example 4 produce the 'cash flows from operating activities'
section of the cash flow statement using the direct method.

Solution
EMMA CO
Cash flow statement for year ended 31 December 20X8 (extract)
$
Cash flows from operating activities
Cash receipts from customers
Cash payments to suppliers and employees
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid
Income taxes paid
Net cash used in operating activities

23.12

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 23

7.1

The cash flow statement shows the movement between a companys cash and cash
equivalents at the beginning and the end of the year.

7.2

Cash comprises cash on hand and on demand deposits. Cash equivalents are short term,
highly liquid investments such as shares held as a current asset investment.

7.3

The cash flow categorises cash flows under one of three headings: cash flows from
operating activities; cash flows from investing activities and cash flows from financing
activities.

23.13

23: CASH FLOW STATEMENTS

23.14

Chapter 23: Questions

23.15

23: QUESTIONS

23.1

In a cash flow statement which of the items below would not appear as an outflow of cash?
A

The nominal value of debenture redeemed at par during the year

The dividends paid to preference shareholders during the year

The income statement charge for tax for the year

(1 mark)

Data for Questions 23.2 and 23.3


Extracts from a companys balance sheets show the following items of property, plant and equipment at net book
value:
30 June
20X7
$
Property, plant and equipment
Freehold property
Plant and equipment
Furniture and fixtures

20X6
$

1,230,000
465,000
90,000

750,000
380,000
105,000

The building element of the freehold property was depreciated by $6,000 and then revalued on 30 June 20X7 by
$95,000. Plant and equipment, which had cost $49,000 when purchased in January 20X2 on which $35,000 of
depreciation had been charged, was disposed of in November 20X6 for $8,000. Depreciation on the plant and
equipment for the year amounted to $37,000. Depreciation of $55,000 has been charged on furniture and
fixtures.
23.2

What is the total figure to be adjusted for in cash flows from operating activities in respect of property,
plant and equipment? $
(2 marks)

23.3

What is the total expenditure on property, plant and equipment included under cash flows from investing
activities? $
(2 marks)

23.4

In a cash flow statement, a decrease in loan stock would be shown as a cash inflow under 'cash flows
from financing activities'.

23.5

True

False

(1 mark)

These extracts have been taken from the accounts of Jeanne Co.
Balance sheet (extracts)
Current liabilities
Dividends payable

31 October
20X7

31 October
20X6

9,750

5,750

Dividends charged to retained earnings during the year were $15,500.


What will appear as dividends paid in the cash flow statement for the year ended 31 October 20X7?
A

$5,750

$11,500

$15,500

$21,250

(2 marks)

23.16

23: QUESTIONS

23.6

Jane Co
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X2
$000
2,553
1,814
739
125
264
25
75
300
140
160

Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
Investment income
Finance costs
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period
Balance sheet as at 31 December
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Development expenditure
Investments
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Short-term investments
Cash in hand
Total assets
Equity
Share capital ($1 ordinary shares)
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Retained earnings
Non-current liabilities
Long term loan
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Bank overdraft
Income tax payable
Dividends payable

20X7
$000

20X6
$000

380
250

630

305
200
25
530

150
390
50
2
592
1,222

102
315

1
418
948

200
160
100
160
620

150
150
91
100
491

100

127
85
190
100
502
1,222

Total equity and liabilities

23.17

119
98
160
80
457
948

23: QUESTIONS

The following information is available:


(a)

The proceeds of the sale of non-current asset investments amounted to $30,000;

(b)

Furniture and fixtures, with an original cost of $85,000 and a net book value of $45,000, were sold
for $32,000 during the year;

(c)

The current asset investments fall within the definition of cash equivalents under IAS 7;

(d)

The following information relates to property, plant and equipment:


20X7
$000
720
340
380

Cost
Accumulated depreciation
Net book value
(e)

50,000 $1 ordinary shares were issued during the year at a premium of 20c per share;

(f)

Dividends charged to retained earnings were $100,000 in 20X7;

(g)

Development expenditure has not yet started being amortised.

Required
Prepare a cash flow statement for the year to 31 December 20X7.

23.18

20X6
$000
595
290
305

Chapter 23: Answers

23.19

23: ANSWERS

23.1

Income tax paid is a cash flow not the income statement tax charge.

23.2 $104,000
Property, plant and equipment
Bal b/d

Freehold property
Plant & Equipment
Furniture & Fixtures

Revaluation Freehold property


Acquisitions

$000
750
380
105

95
567
1,897

$000
Disposal Plant & Equipment
(49 35)
Depreciation
Freehold property
6
Plant & Equipment
37
Furniture & Fixtures
55
Bal c/d Freehold property
Plant & Equipment
Furniture & Fixtures

Total adjustments in the reconciliation:


Depreciation
Loss on disposal of plant and equipment (8 14)
23.3

14

98
1,230
465
90
1,897
$000
98
6
104

$567,000
See previous calculation

23.4

23.5 B

Dividends payable
$
Balance b/d
Paid

11,500

Balance c/d

9,750
21,250

Retained earnings

$
5,750
15,500
21,250

23.20

23: ANSWERS

23.6

Jane Co
Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7
$000

Cash flows from operating activities


Profit before taxation
Adjustments for:
Depreciation (W2)
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment (45 32)
Profit on sale of non-current asset investments (30 25)
Investment income
Finance costs

$000

300
90
13
(5)
(25)
75
448
(75)
(48)
8
333
25
(75)
(110)

Increase in trade receivables (390 315)


Increase in inventories (150 102)
Increase in trade payables (127 119)
Cash generated from operations
Interest received
Interest paid
Income taxes paid (W4)
Net cash from operating activities

173

Cash flows from investing activities


Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of non-current asset investments
Payments for development expenditure (W3)

(201)
32
30
(50)

Net cash used in investing activities

(189)

Cash flows from financing activities


Proceeds from issue of ordinary share capital
Proceeds from long term loan
Dividends paid (W5)

60
100
(80)

Net cash from financing activities

80

Increase in cash and cash equivalents


Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period (1 98)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period (50 + 2 85)

64
(97)
(33)

Workings
(W1)
Property, plant and equipment cost
Balance b/d
Revaluation (100 91)
Additions (bal fig)

$000
595
9
201
805

Disposals
Balance c/d

$000
85
720
805

(W2)
Property, plant and equipment - Accumulated depreciation
Disposals (85 45)
Balance c/d

$000
40
340
380

23.21

Balance b/d
Depreciation charge

$000
290
90
380

23: ANSWERS

(W3)
Development expenditure
Balance b/d
additions

$000
200
50
250

$000
Balance c/d

250
250

(W4)
Income tax payable
Income tax paid
Balance c/d

$000
110
190
300

Balance b/d
Income statement

$000
160
140
300

(W5)
Dividends payable
Dividends paid
Balance c/d

$000
80
100
180

Balance b/d
Retained earnings

END OF CHAPTER

23.22

$000
80
100
180

Home study chapter


Information technology

Syllabus Guide Detailed Outcomes


Having studied this chapter you will be able to:

Understanding the basic function and form of accounting records in manual and computerised systems.

Compare manual and computerised systems and identify advantages and disadvantages of computerised
accounting systems.

Understand the uses of integrated accounting software packages.

Understand business use of computers and the nature and purpose of spreadsheets and database systems.

Exam Context
Questions on this topic are likely to focus on the advantages and disadvantages of using a computerised system and the
differences between a manual and a computerised system.

Qualification Context
The importance of accounting systems and internal controls is tested in the Fundamentals level paper, Accountant in
Business (F1).

24.1

24: HOME STUDY CHAPTER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Overview
Integrated software

Computerised accounting
packages

Accounting modules

Information
technology

Databases

Spreadsheets

24.2

24: HOME STUDY CHAPTER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Introduction

1.1

In today's world most businesses use accounting systems which are computerised, although
some smaller businesses may keep manual records.

1.2

The same principles of double entry are used regardless of whether an accounting system is
manual or computerised.

Accounting packages

2.1

There are two main types of computerised accounting packages:

2.2

(a)

Dedicated accounting packages, for example SAGE.

(b)

General software, for example spreadsheets which can be used to keep accounting
records.

Advantages and disadvantages of computerised accounting packages.


Advantages

Disadvantages

(1) Large amounts of data can be


processed very quickly

(1) Time and cost in setting up the system


and staff training

(2) Computerised systems are more


accurate

(2) Need for internal controls and security


checks to ensure the accuracy of data

(3) Large volumes of data can be


processed

(3) Lack of 'audit trail'

(4) Little training is required

(4) Staff may resist the introduction of a


computerised system

(5) Computer can analyse data into


tailored reports

Accounting modules

Definition
3.1

Accounting module a program which deals with one part of a business' accounting
system

3.2

Examples of modules include:


(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)

Invoicing
Receivables ledger
Nominal ledger
Payroll
Cash book
Non-current asset register

24.3

24: HOME STUDY CHAPTER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Integrated software
3.3

Each module may be integrated with other modules so that when information is recorded in
one module it is automatically updated in another module.
Examples:

Section 1.5

3.4

(a)

The payroll module may be integrated with the nominal ledger module so that once
the payroll information is determined the associated wages expense is updated in the
nominal ledger.

(b)

The invoicing module may be integrated with the inventory, receivables ledger and
nominal ledger modules so that once an invoice is sent the inventory levels are
updated as is the customer's account in the receivables ledger.

Advantages and disadvantages of integrated software.


Advantages

Disadvantages

(1)

An entry in one module


automatically updates all the
others

(1)

These systems require more memory than


a stand-alone system so there is less space
to store actual data

(2)

Reports generated by the


system can draw information
from all relevant modules

(2)

Each module may be limited to fewer


functions than a specialised module
(because one program is doing everything)

(3)

Reduction in clerical time used


to input information and errors

(3)

An error in one part of the system will flow


through to all areas

Databases

Definition
4.1

A database is a 'pool of data' which can be used by any number of applications.

4.2

Examples:
(a)
(b)
(c)

Non-current asset register


List of customers/suppliers
Price lists

24.4

24: HOME STUDY CHAPTER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Lecture example 1

Idea generation

What sort of information might be contained in a database file for a non-current asset register?

Solution

4.3

A database should have four major objectives.


(a)
(b)
(c)

It should be shared

different individuals should be able to access the


same information
Its integrity must be preserved
only valid alterations to information should be
made
It should meet the needs of different users.
For example, the accounts department may be interested predominantly in the net book
value of the non-current assets but the production manager will need to know their
whereabouts in order to schedule jobs efficiently

(d)

The database must be able to grow and develop according to the needs of the business

Spreadsheets

5.1

Spreadsheets are essentially an electronic piece of paper. They are used in all parts of a
business, predominantly to perform numerical calculations.

5.2

Uses of spreadsheets by the accounting function:


(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

To maintain accounting records, for example a cash book


To produce financial statements
To produce budgets/forecasts
To conduct variance analysis

24.5

24: HOME STUDY CHAPTER INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Quick Quiz

Summary of Chapter 24

6.1

There are two main types of accounting packages: dedicated packages and general
software.

6.2

An accounting module is a program which deals with one part of a business accounting
system. These modules may or may not be integrated with other modules.

6.3

Databases and spreadsheets are electronic ways of holding and manipulating information.

24.6

Chapter 24: Questions

24.7

24: QUESTIONS

24.1

All businesses will apply the same principles of double entry bookkeeping regardless of whether they
operate a manual or a computerised system.
Is this statement true or false?

24.2

True

False

(1 mark)

If a database is to contain accurate and valid information it should only be amended by authorised
personnel.
Is this statement true or false?
A

True

False

(1 mark)

24.8

Chapter 24: Answers

24.9

24: ANSWERS

24.1

24.2

END OF CHAPTER

24.10

Answers to
Lecture Examples

25.1

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 1
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Users of financial information
(a)

Investors

(b)

Employees

(c)

Ability of entity to continue supplying


Profitability as a measure of value for money of goods bought

Government and their agencies

(g)

Likelihood of payment on time


Likelihood of payment at all
Whether they should continue to supply

Customers

(f)

Whether return on finance will continue to be met


Other providers and security of their debt
Likelihood of repayment of capital amount

Suppliers

(e)

Profitability
Long-term growth
Security of their job
Likelihood of bonus
Number of employees
Ability to pay retirement benefits

Lenders

(d)

Profitability
Future prospects
Likely risk and return
Chance of capital growth
Ability to pay dividends

Statistics
Size of company
Growth rates
Average payment periods
Foreign trade
Profits made
Corporate income tax liability
Sales tax liability

Public

Contribution to local economy


Information about trends in the prosperity of the entity
Range of activities provided

25.2

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 2
Answer to Lecture Example 1
A

The IASCF appoints members to the IASB, IFRIC and SAC. The SAC advises the IASB on its
agenda.

Answer to Lecture Example 2


A

Chapter 3
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Advantages of historic cost
(1)

The transaction cost of $1 million is a very reliable figure which was quantified at the date of
acquisition.

(2)

Using current market values for the building may lead to volatility in asset values due to changing
market prices.

(3)

Any change in the asset's value will affect the amount of depreciation charged and therefore the
entity's profits. This makes comparability more difficult.

Disadvantages of historic cost


(1)

Asset values generally appreciate over time and so using historic cost will mean that the financial
statements contain information which is out of date and therefore less useful for decision making.

(2)

Sales revenue and costs will be shown at current prices but depreciation will be based on historic
cost and therefore too low a figure. Profits will therefore look artificially high.

Answer to Lecture Example 2


(a)

Historic cost is $1,000

(b)

Net realisable value is


$
1,100
(200)
900

Selling price (100 $11)


Less: completion costs (100 $2)
(c)

Show inventory at the lower of cost and net realisable value = $900.

25.3

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 4
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Own
Examples:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

House
Car
Cash

Owe
Examples:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

Mortgage
Car loan
Credit card

Chapter 5
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Transaction

Debit

Credit

(a)

Sales for cash

Cash
increase asset

Sales
income

(b)

Sales on credit

Receivables
increase asset

Sales
income

(c)

Purchases for cash

Purchases
expense

Cash
decrease asset

(d)

Purchases on credit

Purchases
expense

Payables
increase liability

(e)

Pay electricity bill

Electricity
expense

Cash
decrease asset

(f)

Receive cash from a credit customer

Cash
increase assets

Receivables
decrease assets

(g)

Pay cash to a credit supplier

Payables
decrease liability

Cash
decrease asset

(h)

Borrow money from the bank

Cash
increase asset

Loan
increase liability

25.4

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Cash
$
5,000
2,100

Capital
Sales

Rent
Electricity
Car
Drawings

$
500
200
1,000
300

Capital
$

Cash

Trade payables
$
Purchases

Trade payables

Purchases
$
2,000

$
5,000
$
2,000
$

Rent
Cash

$
500

Cash

Electricity
$
200

Car
$
1,000

Cash

Drawings
$
300

Cash

Trade receivables
$
1,750

Sales

Sales
$

Trade receivables
Cash

$
1,750
2,100

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Dr
2/1
10/1

Sales
Sales

$
500
500
1,000

Bal b/d

650

25.5

Cash
1/1 Purchases
25/1 Telephone
Bal c/d

$
300
50
650
1,000

Cr

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Cash
Capital
Sales

$
5,000
2,100

Rent
Electricity
Car
Drawings
Bal c/d

7,100
Bal b/d

$
500
200
1,000
300
5,100
7,100

5,100
Capital

Bal c/d

$
5,000
5,000

Cash
Bal b/d

Bal c/d

Trade payables
$
2,000
Purchases
2,000

$
5,000
5,000
5,000
$
2,000
2,000

Bal b/d

2,000

Trade Payables

Purchases
$
2,000
Bal c/d

$
2,000

Bal b/d

2,000
Rent

Cash

$
500

Bal b/d

500

Bal c/d

$
500

Electricity
Cash

$
200

Bal b/d

200

Bal c/d

$
200

Car
Cash

$
1,000

Bal c/d

$
1,000

Bal b/d

1,000

Cash

Drawings
$
300
Bal c/d

$
300

Bal b/d

300

Sales

Trade receivables
$
1,750
Bal c/d

Bal b/d

1,750

25.6

$
1,750

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Sales
Bal c/d

$
3,850

Trade receivables
Cash

$
1,750
2,100
3,850

Bal b/d

3,850

3,850

Chapter 6
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Trial Balance
Debit
$
5,100

Cash
Capital
Trade payables
Purchases
Rent
Electricity
Car
Drawings
Trade receivables
Sales

2,000
500
200
1,000
300
1,750
10,850

Credit
$
5,000
2,000

3,850
10,850

Creditors

Purchases
$
2,000
Bal c/d

$
2,000

Bal b/d

2,000

2,000

Income statement
Rent

Cash

$
500

Bal c/d

$
500

Bal b/d

500

Income statement

500

Electricity
Cash

$
200

Bal c/d

$
200

Bal b/d

200

Income statement

200

Bal c/d

$
3,850

Sales

3,850
Income statement

3,850

25.7

Trade receivables
Cash

$
1,750
2,100
3,850

Bal b/d

3,850

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Colin
Income Statement
$

Sales (20 telephones)


Cost of sales
Purchases (50 telephones)
Less: closing inventories (30 telephones)

$
600

1,000
(600)
400
200

Gross profit

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Purchases
Gross profit c/d
Rent
Electricity
Net profit c/d

Income Statement
$
2,000
Sales
2,100
Closing inventory
4,100
500
Gross profit b/d
200
1,400
2,100

$
3,850
250
4,100
2,100
2,100

Net profit b/d

1,400

Answer to Lecture Example 4


(e)

DOUGLAS
INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE MONTH OF JANUARY
$

Sales
Less cost of sales:
Purchases
Less: closing inventories

$
3,850

2,000
( 250)
1,750

Gross profit

2,100

Less expenses:
Rent
Electricity

500
200
(700)
1,400

Net profit

25.8

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

DOUGLAS
BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31 JANUARY
NON-CURRENT ASSET
Motor vehicle

CURRENT ASSETS
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash

250
1,750
5,100

PROPRIETORS INTEREST
Capital introduced on 1 January
Profit for the year
Less: drawings
Balance 31 January

$
5,000
1,400
300

$
1,000

7,100
8,100
$

6,100

CURRENT LIABILITIES
Trade payables

2,000
8,100

Answer to Lecture Example 5


Cash
Bal b/d

Drawings
$
300
Bal c/d
300
Capital

Capital

Income statement
$
2,000
Sales
2,100
Closing inventory
4,100
500
Gross profit b/d
200
1,400
2,100
1,400
Net profit b/d

Balance c/d

$
5,000

Purchases
Gross profit c/d
Rent
Electricity
Net profit c/d

$
300
300
$
3,850
250
4,100
2,100
2,100
1,400

Capital

Drawings
Balance c/d

300
6,100
6,400

Answer to Lecture Example 6


Assets = capital + (profit drawings) + payables
8,100 = 5,000 + (1,400 300) + 2,000

25.9

Cash

$
5,000

Balance b/d
Net profit

5,000
1,400
6,400

Balance b/d

6,100

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 7
Answer to Exercise
(1)

Factory buys raw material

Net
$
100

(2)

Manufactures goods and sells to wholesaler

250

Sales tax
$
15.00

Gross
$
115.00

287.50
37.50
22.50 Due to sales tax authority

Answer to Lecture Example 1


Purchases

Trade payables

$
Trade payables 1,000

Purchases

Trade receivables

Sales tax control a/c

$
1,725

Sales

$
1,150

Trade payables

$
150

Trade rec.

$
225

Sales
$
Trade rec.

$
1,500

Chapter 8
Answer to Lecture Example 1
C

Transport costs to deliver goods to customers are an example of carriage outwards and should
not be included. Administrative overheads do not relate to production and cannot therefore be
included.
The depreciation of the factory machine is a production overhead and should be included.

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Net realisable value is:
$
35
(12)
(1)
22

Estimated selling price


Less: costs of completion
Less: selling costs

25.10

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 3


(a)

Closing inventories (FIFO)


Purchases
Opening
inventories
200
Sales
14 Jan
21 Jan
28 Jan

(200)

10 Jan

20 Jan

25 Jan

300

350

250

(180)
(80)
Nil

250

@ $11.50
= $1,035

@ $13.00
= $3,250

(80)
(220)
Nil

Nil

$4,285
Cost of sales (FIFO)

$
2,000
10,530
12,530
(4,285)
8,245

Opening inventories (200 x $10)


Purchases
Less: closing inventories
(b)

Closing inventories and cost of sales (AVCO)


Units
1.1.X2

b/f

200

10.1.X2

Purchase

300
500

14.1.X2

Sale

(280)
220

20.1.X2

Purchase

350
570

21.1.X2

Sale

(400)
170

25.1.X2

Purchase

250
420

28.1.X2

Sale

(80)
340

(W1)

$5,255
500

= $10.51

(W2)

Average
Unit Cost
$

Cost
$
10.00
10.85

(W1) 10.51
10.51
11.50
(W2) 11.12
11.12
13.00

(W3) 12.24
12.24

$6,337
570

25.11

= $11.12

(W3)

Total
Cost
$
2,000

Cost of
Sales
$

3,255
5,255
(2,943)
2,312

2,943

4,025
6,337
(4,448)
1,889

4,448

3,250
5,139
(979)
4,160
$5,139
420

= $12.24

979
8,370

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 9
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Examples include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Land and buildings


Plant and equipment
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fittings, computers

Answer to Lecture Example 2


B

The cost capitalised should include the purchase price ($20,000) plus all directly attributable costs
(delivery and installation).
The cost of the maintenance contract should be shown as an expense in the income statement.

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Straight line method:
(a)

(b)

Depreciation charge

$2,500 - $250
3 years

$750 per annum

Year

Cost

1
2
3

$
2,500
2,500
2,500

Accumulated
depreciation
$
750
1,500
2,250

NBV
$
1,750
1,000
250

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Reducing balance method:

Year 1
Year 2
Year 3

NBV b/d

Depn
rate

(6,000 0)
(6,000 2,400)
(6,000 3,840)

40%
40%
40%

Depn
expense
$
2,400
1,440
864

Accumulated
depreciation
$
2,400
3,840
4,704

NBV c/d
$
3,600
2,160
1,296

Answer to Lecture Example 5


(a)

Journal entry
Debit
$
750

Depreciation expense
Accumulated depreciation

Credit
$
750

Being annual depreciation charged on machine

25.12

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(b)

Accounting for depreciation:


Machine (B/S)
$
Cash

2,500
2,500
2,500

Bal b/d

Bal c/d

2,500
2,500

Depreciation expense (I/S)


$

Year 1

Accumulated depn

750

Year 1

I/S

750

Year 2

Accumulated depn

750

Year 2

I/S

750

Year 3

Accumulated depn

750

Year 3

I/S

750

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


$

Bal c/d

750

Year 1

Depreciation expense

750

Bal c/d

1,500

Year 2

Bal b/d
Depreciation expense

750
750
1,500

Year 3

Bal b/d
Depreciation expense

1,500
750
2,250

1,500
Bal c/d

2,250
2,250

(c)

Income statement (extracts):


Expenses
Depreciation

Year 1
$

Year 2
$

Year 3
$

750

750

750

Balance sheet (extracts):


Cost
(Year 1)
(Year 2)
(Year 3)

$
2,500
2,500
2,500

Machine
Machine
Machine

25.13

Accumulated
Depreciation
$
(750)
(1,500)
(2,250)

Net Book
Value
$
1,750
1,000
250

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 6


(a)

$
3,000
(2,160)
840

Sales proceeds
NBV at end of year 2
(b)
Machine (B/S)
$
6,000

Bal b/d

(a)

Disposal account

$
6,000

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


$
(b)

Disposal account

3,840

$
Bal b/d

3,840

Disposal account
(a)

Machine
Balance = profit
on disposal (I/S)

$
6,000

(c)

Cash

(b)

Accumulated depn

$
3,000

840
6,840

3,840
6,840

Answer to Lecture Example 7


(a)

The profit on disposal is still $840, the only difference is that the proceeds were not received in
cash, but in the form of a part exchange allowance.

(b)

Cash paid for the new machine is $7,000 ($10,000 $3,000)


Old machine (B/S)
Bal b/d

$
6,000

(a)

Disposal account

$
6,000

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


(b)

Disposal account

$
3,840

Bal b/d

$
3,840

New machine (B/S)


(c) Disposal account
Cash
Bal b/d

$
3,000
7,000
10,000
10,000

25.14

Bal c/d

$
10,000
10,000

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Disposal account
(a) Machine
Profit on disposal (I/S)

$
6,000
840
6,840

(c)
(b)

New machine (part exchange)


Accumulated depreciation

$
3,000
3,840
6,840

Answer to Lecture Example 8


(a)

The double entry is


Dr
Dr
Cr

$
50,000
20,000

Non-current asset building (150 100)


Accumulated depreciation building
Revaluation reserve ()

$
70,000

Building (B/S)
$

Bal b/d

$
100,000
50,000
150,000
150,000

Revaluation reserve

Accumulated depreciation (B/S)


$
20,000 Bal b/d

Bal b/d
Revaluation reserve

Bal c/d

150,000
150,000

$
20,000

Revaluation reserve (B/S)


$
Bal c/d

(b)

Building
Accumulated depreciation

70,000
70,000

Depreciation charge is

Bal b/d

$
50,000
20,000
70,000
70,000

$150,000
= $3,750
40 years

Answer to Lecture Example 9


Review of useful life:
Year

Depreciation
charge
$
8,000

Accumulated
depreciation
$
8,000

NBV
$
32,000

20X1

40,000
5

20X2

40,000
5

8,000

16,000

24,000

20X3

24,000
2

12,000

28,000

12,000

20X4

24,000
2

12,000

40,000

40,000

25.15

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 10


Change in method of depreciation:
Depreciation
charge
$
10,000
7,500
7,000

40,000 25%
30,000 25%
22,500 - 1,500
3

20X1
20X2
20X3
20X4
20X5

Accumulated
depreciation
$
10,000
17,500
24,500

7,000
7,000
38,500

31,500
38,500

NBV
$
30,000
22,500
15,500
8,500
1,500

Chapter 10
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(1)

Market research would take place at an early stage in any development process. Its purpose is to
gather information about whether there may be interest in a potential product. At this point in time
an entity cannot be certain that the expenditure will lead to profits and so the costs are research
costs. $20,000 should be shown as an expense in the income statement.

(2)

A machine is a tangible non-current asset and is accounted for under IAS 16 regardless of its use.
The $100,000 should be capitalised as a tangible non-current asset and depreciated over its
useful life of 10 years.

(3)

Material costs and design and manufacture salaries are part of the development process. They
should be capitalised as an intangible non-current asset provided that all of the 'PIRATE' criteria
are met.
The costs should be amortised in 20X9 once the car is available to be sold on the market.

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Income statement extracts
Expenses
Research expenditure
Amortisation of
development expenditure

Balance sheet extracts


Non-current assets
Development expenditure
Amortisation
Net book value

X1
$
35,000

X2
$

X3
$

X4
$

X5
$
38,000

40,000

40,000

40,000

X3
$
120,000
(40,000)
80,000

X4
$
120,000
(80,000)
40,000

X5
$
120,000
(120,000)

X1
$
55,000

55,000

X2
$
120,000

120,000

25.16

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 11
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)

$
Electricity expense
Cash paid:
10.3.X7
12.6.X7
14.9.X7
10.12.X7

96
120
104
145
465
56

December expense missing ( 1 $168)


3

521
$

Rent expense
Cash paid:

1.2.X7
6.4.X7

375
1,584
1,959
(396)

Less: expense relating to Jan March ( 3 $1,584)


12

1,563

(b) & (c)


Electricity accrual is $56
Dr Electricity expense (I/S)
Cr Accruals (B/S)

$
56

$
396

56

Being: electricity expense accrued at 31 December 20X7.


Rent prepayment is $396
Dr Prepayments (B/S)
Cr Rent expense (I/S)

396

Being: rent expense prepaid at 31 December 20X7.

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Electricity expense (I/S)
10.3.X7
12.6.X7
14.9.X7
10.12.X7
31.12.X7

Cash
Cash
Cash
Cash
Accruals

$
96
120
104
145
56
521

25.17

31.12.X7

Transfer to income
statement

521
521

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Rent expense (I/S)


1.2.X7
6.4.X7

$
375
1,584

Cash
Cash

$
31.12.X7
31.12.X7

Transfer to income
statement
Prepayments

1,563
396

1,959

1,959

Accruals (B/S)
31.12.X7

$
56
56

Bal c/d

31.12.X7

Electricity

1.1.X8

Bal b/d

$
56
56
56

Prepayments (B/S)
31.12.X7

Rent

$
396

Bal b/d

396
396

$
31.12.X7

1.1.X8

Bal c/d

396
396

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Working
Electricity expense (I/S)
12.3.X8
9.6.X8
12.9.X8
12.12.X8
31.12.X8

$
168
134
118
158
63

Cash
Cash
Cash
Cash
Accrual ( 13 $189)

1.1.X8
31.12.X8

$
56
585

Accrual reversed
To Income statement

641

641
Accruals (B/S)
1.1.X8
31.12.X8

$
56
63
119

Accrual reversed
Bal c/d

1.1.X8
31.12.X8
1.1.X9

$
56
63
119
63

Bal b/d
Electricity accrual (W)
Bal b/d

Answer to Lecture Example 4


B
$

Insurance expense
July X6 August X6 ( 212 $24,000)

4,000

Sept X6 June X7 ( 1012 $30,000)

25,000
29,000

Prepayment
1 June X7 paid (
Less: June X7 (

7,500

1 $30,000)
4
1 $7,500)
3

(2,500)
5,000

25.18

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 12
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)
(b)

The balance c/d on the trade receivables account at the end of the year is $50,000.
The bad debt expense shown in the I/S is $15,000

Workings
Trade receivables (B/S)
31.12.X7

$
65,000

Bal b/d

65,000

$
31.12.X7
31.12.X7

Bad debt expense


(Ali $7,000)
(Tyson $8,000)
Bal c/d

15,000
50,000
65,000

Bad debt expense (I/S)


$

$
31.12.X7

Trade receivables

15,000

31.12.X7

To I/S

15,000

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Allowance for receivables:
(a)
(b)

The allowance for receivables shown on the balance sheet is $3,500


The doubtful debts expense shown in the I/S is $3,500

Working
Allowance for receivables (B/S)
$
Bal c/d

3,500

$
Doubtful debts expense

3,500

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$

$
Allowance for receivables

3,500

Income statement extract

3,500

Expenses
Bad debts (see Lecture Example 1)
Doubtful debts expense

(15,000)
(3,500)

Balance sheet extract


Current assets
Trade receivables
Less: allowance for receivables

I/S

$
50,000
(3,500)
46,500

25.19

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 3


(a)
(b)

The allowance for receivables shown in the balance sheet is $1,334


The bad and doubtful debts expense shown in the income statement is $1,674.
Trade receivables (B/S)
$
47,440

Bal b/d

47,440
Bal b/d

Bad & doubtful debts expense


Bal c/d

$
340
47,100
47,100

47,100
Allowance for receivables (B/S)

Bal c/d
Specific
General (W)

$
400
934

Bad and doubtful debts expense

1,334
1,334

$
1,334

1,334
Bal b/d

1,334

Bad and doubtful debts expense (I/S)


Trade receivables
Allowance for receivables

$
340
1,334
1,674

$
I/S

1,674
1,674

Working
(W)

General allowance:
$
47,100
(400)
46,700 2%

Trade receivables (net of bad debts written off)


Less: specific allowance

= $934

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Bad debts recovered:
Trade receivables (B/S)
$
1.1.X8 Bal b/d

50,000

Bad debt expense (I/S)


$

$
I/S

7,000

25.20

Cash

7,000

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Cash (B/S)
$
Bad debt expense

7,000

Answer to Lecture Example 5


Specific allowance recovered:
Trade receivables (B/S)
Bal b/d

$
50,000

(a)

$
3,500
46,500
50,000

Cash
Bal c/d

50,000
Allowance for receivables (B/S)
$
(b)

Doubtful debts expense

3,500

$
Bal b/d

3,500

Bad and doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$

$
I/S

3,500

(b)

Allowance for doubtful debts

3,500

Answer to Lecture Example 6


$
Dr
Cr

Allowance for receivables


Trade receivables

3,500

$
3,500

Answer to Lecture Example 7


Changes in general allowance:
The doubtful debts expense in 20X8 is $500 [(30,000 x 5%) (20,000 x 5%)]
Long method
Allowance for receivables (B/S)
(a)

Doubtful debts expense


(20,000 5%)
Bal c/d

$
1,000
1,500
2,500

25.21

31.3.X7 Bal b/d


($20,000 5%)
(ii)

$
1,000

31.3.X8 Doubtful debts expense


($30,000 5%)
1,500
2,500

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)


(ii)

$
1,500

Allowance for receivables

(a)

$
1,000
500
1,500

Allowance for receivables


I/S

1,500

Short method
Allowance for receivables (B/S)
$
31.3.X8

Bal c/d
($30,000 5%)

31.3.X7

1,500

Bal b/d
($20,000 5%)

1,000

Doubtful debts expense


(increase in allowance)

1,500

500
1,500

Doubtful debts expense (I/S)


$
Allowance for receivables

500

$
I/S

500

Answer to Lecture Example 8


A

$13,000
Allowance for
receivables
$
(1)
(2)
(3)

Write off recovered


Write off in 20X8
Change in allowance:
At 30.9.X7
At 30.9.X8
Decrease required

24,000
21,000
3,000

Income
statement
$
(2,000)
18,000

(3,000)
13,000

Chapter 13
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)

A provision should be made using expected values:


($1m 20%) + ($6m 5%) = $0.5m
Dr
Cr

(b)

Warranty cost expense (I/S)


Provisions (B/S)

$0.5m
$0.5m

In 20X8 the provision needs to increase by $0.25m ($0.75m $0.5m). Entry is:
Dr
Cr

Warranty cost expense (I/S)


Provisions (B/S)

$0.25m
$0.25m

25.22

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(c)

In 20X9 the provision needs to decrease by $0.45m ($0.75m $0.3m). Entry is


Dr
Cr

Provisions (B/S)
Warranty cost expense (I/S)

$0.45m
$0.45m

Chapter 14
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(1)

Books of prime entry


Sales day book
Date
10 Jan X6
10 Jan X6

Customer
Customer A
Customer B

Amount
150
200
350

Purchase day book


Date
15 Jan X6
15 Jan X6

Supplier
Supplier Y
Supplier Z

Amount
100
1,300
1,400

Cash receipts book


Date
21 Jan X6

Narrative
Customer B

Total
200

Sales

200

Receivables
200
200

Cash payments book


Date
21 Jan X6

Narrative
Supplier Y

Total
100

Purchases

100

Payables
100
100

Memorandum ledgers
Receivables ledger

Bal b/d

Customer A
$
150
Bal c/d
150
150

10.1.X6

Customer B
$
200
21.1.X6 Payment received

$
200

200

200

10.1.X6

Sales

Sales

25.23

$
150
150

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Payables ledger

21.1.X6

Payment made

Bal c/d

Supplier Y
$
100
15.1.X6 Purchases

$
100

100

100

Supplier Z
$
1,300
15.1.X6 Purchases

$
1,300

1,300

1,300

(2)&(3) Nominal ledger


RLCA (B/S)
$
350
21.1.X6 Bank
Bal c/d
350
150

10.1.X6 Sales
Bal b/d

PLCA (B/S)
$
100
15.1.X6 Purchases
1,300
1,400
Bal b/d

21.1.X6 Bank
Bal c/d

Bal b/d
$

Sales (I/S)
10.1.X6
RLCA

(4)

$
1,400
1,400
1,300

Bank (B/S)
$
200
21.1.X6 PLCA
Bal c/d
200
100

21.1.X6 RLCA

I/S

$
200
150
350

350
350

$
350
350

15.1.X6
PLCA

$
100
100
200
Purchases (I/S)
$
1,400
1,400

I/S

$
1,400
1,400

Reconciliation
Balance per list of balances

Receivables ledger
Customer A
Customer B

150

150

Balance per RLCA

150

Balance per list of balances


$

Payables ledger
Supplier Y
Supplier Z

1,300
1,300

Balance per PLCA

1,300

25.24

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 2


(a)
Sales
$
1.1.X7 RLCA

RLCA (B/S)
$
10,000

$
1.1.X7 Sales 10,000

(b)
Bank (B/S)
4.1.X7 RLCA

$
9,000

RLCA (B/S)
$

$
1.1.X7 Sales 10,000

$
4.1.X7 Bank 9,000
Discounts 1,000
allowed

10,000

10,000

Discounts allowed (I/S)


4.1.X7 RLCA

$
1,000

(c)
Bank
$
4.1.X7 RLCA 10,000

RLCA (B/S)
$

$
1.1.X7 Sales 10,000

$
4.1.X7 Bank 10,000

10,000

10,000

Answer to Lecture Example 3


(a)
Purchases
PLCA

$
5,000

PLCA (B/S)
$

$
Purchases

$
5,000

(b)
Bank
$
Bank

PLCA (B/S)
$
4,750

Bank
Discounts
received

$
4,750

$
5,000

250
5,000

25.25

Purchases

5,000

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Discounts received (I/S)


$
PLCA

$
250

(c)
Bank
$

PLCA (B/S)
$

PLCA

5,000

$
Bank

5,000

5,000

Purchases

Answer to Lecture Example 4


B

$
50,000
(6,000)
44,000
(1,760)
42,240

List price
Less: trade discount (12%)
Record purchase at this value
Less: settlement discount (4%)
Calculate sales tax on this value
Sales tax at 15%

$50,336

6,336

Answer to Lecture Example 5


(a)
Balance b/d
Sales

(b)

RLCA
$
614,000
Bank
302,600
Discounts allowed
Contras (PLCA)
Bad debts
Bal c/d
916,600

$
311,000
3,400
8,650
32,000
561,550
916,600

Reconciliation

Bal b/d (part (a))


(i) Sales (SDB undercast)

RLCA
$
561,550
3,600
565,150

Balance per list of balances


(ii) Credit balance included as a debit (2 $450)
Customer balance omitted

25.26

Bal c/d

565,150
565,150
$
563,900
(900)
2,150

1,250
565,150

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 15
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Adjustment of cash book balance
Cash account
$
204
Standing order (3i)
18
Bank charges (3iii)
Balance c/d
222

Balance b/d
Bank interest (3ii)

$
35
14
173
222

Bank reconciliation statement


$
2,618
723
(3,168)
173

Balance per bank statement at 31 March 20X8


Unrecorded lodgements
Outstanding cheques
Balance per cash book at 31 March 20X8

Answer to Lecture Example 2


B

(1) is a bank error, (4) is an outstanding cheque (2), (3) and (5) have all been processed correctly
by the bank but need recording in the cash book.

Chapter 16
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)

Journal entries
(1)

Dr
$
350

Rent and rates


Trade receivables

350

(2)

Discounts allowed
Trade receivables

500

(3)

Trade receivables
Cash at bank

2,620

(4)

Suspense account
Cash at bank

1,900

Stationery and postage


Suspense account

1,460

(5)
(6)

Brought forward
(102,800 85,240)
Cash at bank (4)

500
2,620
1,900
1,460

Capital
Suspense account

(b)

Cr
$

18,000
18,000
Suspense account
$
17,560
1,900
19,460

25.27

Stationery and postage (5)


Capital (6)

$
1,460
18,000
19,460

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Adjustment of profits statement for the year ended 30 April 20X2
Increases
$

Draft profit
Adjustments
Rent (1)
Discounts allowed (2)
Stationery (5)
Total adjustments
Revised profit

Decreases
$

$
12,300

350
500
1,460
(2,310)
9,990

Answer to Lecture Example 3


B

Increases
$
Draft profit
Adjustments:
(1) sales returns (2 $2,700)
(2) depreciation (W)

Decreases
$
5,400
1,250
6,650

Adjusted profit
(W )

$
112,400

(6,650)
105,750

Depreciation charge was


33 13 % ($15,000 2/4) = $2,500
Depreciation charge should have been
$15,000 4 years = $3,750
Incremental depreciation to be charged $1,250

Chapter 17
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)

(1)
Dr
Cr

Inventories (B/S)
Closing inventories (I/S)

Dr
$
647

Cr
$

$
120

647

Being: adjustment to record year end closing inventories.


(2)
Dr
Cr

Drawings (12 $10)


Wages

120

Being: correction of cash drawings posted as wages.

25.28

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(3)
Dr
Cr

$
601

Depreciation expense (I/S)


Accumulated depreciation:
Motor vehicles ($1,740 25%)
Furniture and fittings ($829 20%)

$
435
166

Being: adjustment to record depreciation for the year


(4)
Dr
Cr

$
37

Bad debt expense


Trade receivables

$
37

Being: write off of irrecoverable customer balance.


(5)
Dr
Cr

$
360

Bank (2 $180)
Suspense account

$
360

Being: adjustment to correct cash receipt from trade receivables.


(6)
Dr
Cr

$
63

Drawings
Purchases

$
63

Being: adjustment for goods drawn from business (removed at cost value)
(7)
Dr
Cr

$
100

Rent expense (600 500)


Accruals

$
100

Being: accrual of rent expense.


Dr
Cr

$
90

Prepayments ($180 6/12)


Electricity expense

$
90

Being: prepayment of electricity expense.


(8)
Dr
Cr

$
73

Discounts allowed (I/S)


Suspense account

$
73

Being: adjustment for discounts allowed omitted.


(b)
Suspense account
Bal b/d

$
433

433

25.29

$
(5) Bank
(8) Discounts allowed

360
73
433

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(c)

Mugg
Income statement for the year ended 31 December 20X7
$

Sales
Less: cost of sales
Opening inventories
Purchases (9,876 63)

$
15,542

510
9,813
10,323
647

Less: closing inventories

9,676
5,866
129
5,995

Gross profit
Discounts received
Less expenses:
Rent (500 + 100)
Electricity (240 ( 612 180))

600
150

Insurance
Wages (1,634 120)
Repairs
Depreciation
Travel and entertaining
Bad debts
Discounts allowed

120
1,514
635
601
192
37
73
3,922
2,073

Profit for the period


Mugg
Balance sheet as at 31 December 20X7
Cost
$
Non-current assets
Motor vehicles
Furniture and fixtures
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables (672 37)
Prepayments
Cash and bank balances (5 + 762 + 360)

Capital
Capital as at 1 January 20X7
Profit for the period
Less: drawings (1,200 + 63 + 120)

1,740
830
2,569

Accumulated
depreciation
$
870
332
1,202

NBV
$
870
498
1,368
647
635
90
1,127
2,499
3,867
$
2,377
2,073
(1,383)
3,067

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Accruals

700
100
800
3,867

25.30

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 18
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Sales

%
100

$
476,000

COS

60

285,600

GP

40

190,400

x 60%

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Sales

%
130

$
221,000

COS

100

170,000

GP

30

51,000

Purchases:

x 100/130

Cost of sales
Opening inventory

43,000

+ Purchases

174,500

Closing inventory

47,500
170,000

Answer to Lecture Example 3


B

Cost structure: 25% mark up.


Sales
COS
Gross profit

=
=

125%
100%
25%

=
=

$
985,000
788,000
197,000

Cost of sales
$
620,000
700,000
1,320,000
(788,000)
532,000
(180,000)
352,000

Opening inventories
Purchases
Less: cost of sales
Closing inventories should be
Closing inventories is
inventory lost in fire

25.31

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Trade payables
$
Till
Bank
Balance c/d
*

$
38,450

Bal b/d

430
167,224
43,825
211,479

Purchases*

Dr Purchases (I/S)
Cr Trade payables

173,029
211,479
$173,029
$173,029

Answer to Lecture Example 5


Cash
$

Bal b/d
Receipts from
Trade receivables (1)

50
General expenses
Drawings
Bankings
Bal c/d

39,204
39,254

Trade receivables
$
1,447
Cash (deduced from
39,685
cash a/c)
Bal c/d
41,132

Bal b/d
Sales* (2)

4,500
6,250
28,454
50
39,254
$
39,204
1,928
41,132

Answer to Lecture Example 6


$4,050
Cost structure:
Sales
COS
Gross profit

Balance b/d
Sales

=
=

100%
80%
20%

=
=

$
23,750
19,000
4,750

Cash
$
1,000
Wages
Stationery
23,750
Electricity
Bankings
drawings
Bal c/d
24,750

25.32

$
5,200
500
1,200
12,800
4,050
1,000
24,750

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 19
Answer to Lecture Example 1
(a)
(i)

Bal c/d

Tick
$
50,000

Capital accounts
Cast Balance
$
$
30,000 20,000
Bank

50,000

30,000

20,000

Bal b/d

Tick
$
50,000

Cast
$
30,000

Balance
$
20,000

50,000
50,000

30,000
30,000

20,000
20,000

(ii)

Salary Balance
Interest on capital (12%
Tick
Cast
Balance

Appropriation account for the year ended 31 December 20X4


$
$
Profit b/d from the
15,000
income statement
6,000
3,600
2,400

Profit share
Tick (5/10)
Cast (3/10)
Balance (2/10)

11,500
6,900
4,600

$
50,000

12,000

23,000
50,000

50,000

(iii)

Drawings
Bal c/d

Tick
$
6,000
11,500
17,500

Current accounts
Cast Balance
$
$
4,000
8,800
Salary
6,500 13,200
Interest on
capital
Profit share
10,500 22,000

25.33

Tick
$
6,000
11,500
17,500

Cast
$
3,600
6,900
10,500

Balance
$
15,000
2,400
4,600
22,000

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(iv)
TICK, CAST AND BALANCE
Balance Sheet as at 31 December 20X4 (extract)
$

(b)

Capital accounts
Tick
Cast
Balance

50,000
30,000
20,000

Current accounts
Tick
Cast
Balance

11,500
6,500
13,200

100,000

31,200
131,200

Alternative answer to parts (ii) and (iii) (including interest on drawings)


(ii)

Appropriation account for the year ended 31 December 20X4


$
$
Profit b/d
Salary Balance
15,000
Interest on drawings
Tick (6,000 x 10% x 6/12)
Interest on capital (12%)
Cast (4,000 x 10% x 3/12)
Tick
6,000
Cast
3,600
Balance
2,400
12,000
Profit share
Tick (5/10)
11,700
Cast (3/10)
7,020
Balance (2/10)
4,680
23,400
50,400

$
50,000
300
100

50,400

(iii)

Drawings
Interest on
drawings
Balance c/d

Tick
$
6,000
300
11,400
17,700

Current accounts
Cast Balance
$
$
4,000
8,800
Salary
Interest on
100

capital
6,520 13,280
Profit share
10,620 22,080
Bal b/d

25.34

Tick
$

Cast
$

Balance
$
15,000

6,000
11,700
17,700

3,600
7,020
10,620

2,400
4,680
22,080

11,400

6,520

13,280

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Salaries
Interest on capital
Profit share (6:3:1)
Total profit for the year (W)

X
$
15,000
400
25,320

Y
$

400
12,660

Z
$
8,000
400
4,220

Total
$
23,000
1,200
42,200
66,400

(W)

()

$
67,000
(600)
66,400

Profit before loan interest


Loan interest ($10,000 12% 6/12)

Answer to Lecture Example 3


B

M
$

Salary
PSR (1st half)
PSR (2nd half)

90,000
110,000
200,000

S
$
20,000
30,000
66,000
116,000

$
10,000
30,000
44,000
84,000
$
400,000
40,000
440,000

Profit for year


Add bank expense relating to first half of year
1st Half
$
Profit ($440,000 x 6/12)
Expense relevant to first half of year
Salary S (40,000 x 6/12)
A (20,000 x 6/12)
PSR M 60%
S 20%
A 20%

(90,000)
(30,000)
(30,000)

$
220,000
(40,000)
180,000
(20,000)
(10,000)
150,000

(150,000)

2nd Half
$
Profit ($440,000 x 6/12)
Salary
PSR M 50%
S 30%
A 20%

(110,000)
(66,000)
(44,000)

25.35

$
220,000

220,000

(220,000)

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Goodwill
1 Sept
1 Dec

$
180,000
210,000

Capital a/c
Capital a/c

1 Sept
1 Dec

$
180,000
210,000

Capital a/c
Capital a/c

Capital account

1 Sept
Goodwill
1 Dec
Goodwill

K
$
102,857

C
$
77,143

H
$

S
$

90,000

60,000

60,000

1 Sept
Goodwill
1 Dec
Goodwill

K
$
80,000

C
$
60,000

120,000

90,000

H
$
40,000

Chapter 20
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Rab Co
Dr Cash (200,000 80c)
Cr Share capital (200,000 50c)
Cr Share premium account (200,000 30c)

$
160,000

$
100,000
60,000

Balance sheet (extract) as at 1 June 20X0


Equity
Share capital 50c ordinary shares (50,000 + 100,000)
Share premium account

$
150,000
60,000
210,000

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Bonus Issue
New share capital:

300,000
50c = $37,500
4

Double entry:

$
37,500

Dr Share premium account


Cr Share capital

$
37,500

Balance sheet
Share capital 50c ordinary shares (150,000 + 37,500)
Share premium account (60,000 37,500)
Retained earnings

25.36

$
187,500
22,500
200,000
410,000

S
$

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Rights Issue
$

New share capital:

375,000
50c
5

37,500

Share premium:

375,000
$1
5

75,000

$
112,500

Dr Cash
Cr Share capital
Cr Share premium account

$
37,500
75,000

Rab Co
Balance Sheet (extract)
$
225,000
97,500
230,000
525,500

Share capital 50c ordinary shares


Share premium account
Retained earnings

Answer to Lecture Example 4


ABC Co
Reconciliation of movement in retained earnings
for year ended 31 December 20X6
$
Retained earnings at beginning of year

125,000

Profit for the period


Dividends

$
50,000

preference
ordinary

6,000
10,000
(16,000)
159,000

Retained earnings at end of year

Answer to Lecture Example 5


(1)
Income tax expense (I/S)
31.12.X5 Current tax payable
30.9.X6

$
62,000

Current tax payable

3,000

31.12.X6 Current tax payable

43,000

25.37

31.12.X5 Income statement

$
62,000

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Current tax payable (B/S)


31.12.X5 Balance c/d

$
62,000
62,000

30.9.X6

65,000

Bank

31.12.X6 Bal c/d

43,000
108,000

31.12.X5 Income tax expense


1.1.X6
Balance b/d
30.9.X6 Income tax expense
31.12.X6 Income tax expense
1.1.X7

(2)

Balance b/d

$
62,000
62,000
62,000
3,000
43,000
108,000
43,000

Tax note for the year ended 31 December 20X6


$
43,000
3,000
46,000

Tax charge for the year


Under provision in respect of prior periods

Chapter 21
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Arrow
Income statement for the year ended 30 September 20X6
$'000
12,740
7,040
5,700
2,060
2,375
72
1,193
270
923

Revenue
Cost of sales (W3)
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses (W1)
Finance costs (W6)
Profit before tax
Income tax expense
Profit for the period
Arrow
Balance sheet as at 30 September 20X6

$'000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment

5,000
5,000

Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash and cash equivalents (W2)

610
1,000
1,170
2,780
7,780

Total assets

25.38

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES


Equity
Share capital (1,500 + 250) (W5)
Share premium account (200 + 385) (W5)
Revaluation reserve (800 + 600) (W7)
Retained earnings (W4)

$'000
1,750
585
1,400
1,873
5,608

Non-current liabilities
Long term borrowings

1,200
1,200

Current liabilities
Trade payables
Other payables (W6)
Current tax payable
Short term provisions

550
72
270
80
972
7,780

Total equity and liabilities


Workings
(W1) Administrative expenses
Bad debts written off
Office expenses
Administrative staff salaries
Increase in warranty provision (80 50)

$'000
45
1,800
500
30
2,375

(W2) Cash and cash equivalents


$'000
835
635
(300)
1,170

Per trial balance


Issue of shares (W5)
Dividend paid
(W3) Cost of sales

$'000
7,200
450
(610)
7,040

Purchases
Opening inventories
Closing inventories
(W4) Retained earnings

$'000
1,250
(300)
923
1,873

Per trial balance


Less: dividend paid
Profit for period (per I/S)

25.39

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(W5) Rights issue


Number of shares in issue before rights issue
(1,500,000 2)

3,000,000

Rights issue 1 for 6 basis (3,000,000 6)

500,000

Record as:
Dr
Cr
Cr

Bank (500,000 $1.27)


Share capital (500,000 50c)
Share premium account (500,000 77c)

$635,000
$250,000
$385,000

(W6) Loan interest


$1,200,000 6% = $72,000
(W7) Revaluation
$'000
5,000
(4,400)
600

Revalued amount
PPE per trial balance
Increase

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Share
capital
Balance at 30 September 20X5

$'000
1,500

Share
premium
account
$'000
200

Gain on revaluation of property, plant


and equipment

Dividends
Issue of share capital
Balance at 30 September 20X6

$'000
800

Retained
earnings
$'000
1,250

600

Net income recognised directly in equity


Profit for period
Total recognised income and expense
for the period

Revaluation
reserve

200

250

385

1,750

585

1,400

1,400

923

600
923

2,713

5,273

(300)

(300)
635

1,873

5,608

Chapter 22
Answer to Lecture Example 1
B

1 and 3 are non-adjusting events as the condition did not exist at the balance sheet date.

25.40

$'000
3,750
600

600
1,500

Total
equity

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 23
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Income taxes paid
Income tax payable
$'000
116
156
272

Income tax paid


Bal c/d

Bal b/d
I/S

$'000
168
104
272

Answer to Lecture Example 2


Property, plant and equipment
Plant and equipment cost
Bal b/d
Addition

$'000
200
100
300

Disposal
Bal c/d

$'000
20
280
300

Accumulated depreciation
Disposal
Bal c/d

$'000
9
111
120

Bal b/d
... Charge

Profit/loss on disposal:

$'000
80
40
120

$
11,000
(8,000)
(3,000)

Net book value of asset sold


Sales proceeds
Loss on sale
The entries in the cash flow statement for 20X9 would be:
(i)

Cash flows from operating activities (extract)


Adjustments for
Depreciation
Loss on sale of plant

(ii)

40,000
3,000
43,000

Cash flows from investing activities (extract)


Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from sale of plant

25.41

(100,000)
8,000
(92,000)

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Answer to Lecture Example 3


Dividends paid
Dividends payable
Dividends paid
Bal c/d

$'000
50
45
95

$'000
35
60
95

Bal b/d
Retained earnings

Answer to Lecture Example 4


Emma Co
Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 20X8
$000

Cash flows from operating activities


Profit before taxation
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
Interest expense

$000

87

Increase in trade receivables (168 147)


Increase in inventories (214 210)
Increase in trade payables (136 121)
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid
Income taxes paid (W2)
Net cash from operating activities
Cash flows from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1)
Net cash used in investing activities

42
8
137
(21)
(4)
15
127
(8)
(20)
99
(146)

Cash flows from financing activities


Proceeds from issue of shares (250 + 70 200 60)
Proceeds from issue of debentures
Dividends paid (W3)
Net cash from financing activities
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

(146)
60
30
(22)
68
21
(14)
7

Workings
(W1)

Property, plant and equipment at NBV


$000
Bal b/d
514
Depreciation
Revaluation during the year
10
Bal c/d
(110 100)
Additions
146
670

25.42

$000
42
628
670

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

(W2)
Income tax paid
Bal c/d

(W3)
Dividends paid
Bal c/d

Income tax payable


$000
20
Bal b/d
39
Income tax expense (I/S)
59

$000
28
31
59

Dividends payable
$000
22
Bal b/d
18
Dividend for year
40

$000
16
24
40

Answer to Lecture Example 5


Emma Co
Cash flow statement for the year ended 31 December 20X8 (extract)
$'000

$'000

Cash flow from operating activities


Cash receipts from customers (W1)
Cash payments to suppliers and employees (W2)
Cash generated from operations
Interest paid*
Income taxes paid*
Net cash from operating activities
*

579
(452)
127
(8)
(20)
99

These amounts are the same amounts as in Lecture Example 4.

Workings
(W1)
Bal b/d
Revenue (I/S)

Trade receivables
$'000
147
cash received
600
Bal c/d

$'000
579
168

747
(W2)
cash paid
Bal c/d

747

Trade payables
$'000
Bal b/d
452
Expenses (W3)

$'000
121
467

136
588

(W3)

588
$'000
319
214
(210)

Cost of sales
Add: closing inventories
Less: opening inventories
Purchases
Other expenses
Less: depreciation

186
(42)

25.43

$'000

323
144
467

25: ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

Chapter 24
Answer to Lecture Example 1
Information that may be included in a database file for a non-current asset register:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)

Code/item number to identify asset


Details of category of asset (motor vehicles, machine etc)
Serial number of the asset
Details of physical location of the asset
Person responsible for the asset
Cost of the asset
Date of purchase
Depreciation policy for the asset
Accumulated depreciation charged to date
Net book value of the asset
Insurance details

END OF ANSWERS TO LECTURE EXAMPLES

25.44

Pilot Paper
Questions only

26.1

26.2

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.3

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.4

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.5

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.6

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.7

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.8

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.9

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.10

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.11

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.12

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.13

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.14

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.15

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.16

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.17

26: PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

END OF PILOT PAPER (QUESTIONS ONLY)

26.18

You might also like